Year 4 Short Multiplication and Short Division: worked examples and questions with answers
By the end of this chapter you will be able to
- Multiply and divide whole numbers by 10 and 100 by moving the digits, not by “adding a zero”
- Multiply a two-digit or three-digit number by a one-digit number using partitioning, the grid method and the distributive law
- Use the expanded column method, then short multiplication with carrying
- Divide using place value and known facts, then use short division (the bus stop method) for 2-digit and 3-digit numbers
- Work out and use remainders, and decide what a remainder means in a story
- Solve scaling problems (“4 times as many”) and correspondence problems (3 hats and 5 tops make 15 outfits)
- Multiply three numbers, and solve word problems using bar models
You should already know
- Times tables up to 12 × 12 and the matching division facts (Chapter 3)
- Place value in numbers up to 10,000 (Chapter 1)
- Column addition with carrying (Chapter 2)
- Multiplying by 10 in the 10 times table, and using known facts like 6 × 7 = 42 to work out 60 × 7
Where this leads
- Fractions of amounts and dividing quantities (Chapter 5)
- Money, decimals, and dividing by 10 and 100 to make decimals (Chapter 6)
- Perimeter and area (Chapter 7)
- Long multiplication and long division in Years 5 and 6
- Multiplying and dividing by 1,000 in Year 5
National Curriculum for England, Key Stage 2 mathematics, Year 4. Content: Multiply and divide whole numbers by 10 and 100, Multiply two-digit and three-digit numbers by a one-digit number using a formal written layout, Use the distributive law to multiply two-digit numbers by one digit, and multiply together three numbers, Divide using place value and known facts, including short division with and without remainders for 2- and 3-digit numbers by 1-digit numbers, and interpret remainders, Solve integer scaling problems and harder correspondence problems such as n objects are connected to m objects.
- 4.1 Multiplying and dividing by 10 and 100: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
- 4.2 Partitioning, the grid method and the distributive law: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
- 4.3 Column multiplication: expanded and short: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
- 4.4 Dividing with place value and short division: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
- 4.5 Division with remainders: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
- 4.6 Scaling, correspondence and multiplying three numbers: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
- 4.7 Word problems with bar models: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
- Check-up and SATs-style questions: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · lesson page
Exercise P Do you remember?
Non-calculatorMethod. Eight is double double double. Double the number three times.
- Swap the numbers round. Order does not matter in multiplication, so 7 × 8 = 8 × 7. Use the 8 times table trick.7 × 8 = 8 × 7
- Double once. This gives 2 lots.7 + 7 = 14
- Double again. This gives 4 lots.double 10 = 20, double 4 = 8, so 20 + 8 = 28
- Double a third time. This gives 8 lots.double 20 = 40, double 8 = 16, so 40 + 16 = 56
- Write the answer. 7 × 8 = 56
Check. Check by dividing: 56 ÷ 7 = 8. ✓
Watch out. Count your doubles. Three doubles give 8 lots. Two doubles only give 4.
Method. Use the 9 times table. Count up in 9s until you reach 72.
- Turn the division into a missing multiplication. 72 ÷ 9 asks: what do we multiply 9 by to get 72?72 ÷ 9 = ? means ? × 9 = 72
- Count up in 9s until you reach 72. Each number you say is one more group of 9.9, 18, 27, 36, 45, 54, 63, 72
- Count how many numbers you said. The number of jumps is the answer.I said 8 numbers, so 8 × 9 = 72
- Write the answer. 72 ÷ 9 = 8
Check. Multiply back: 8 × 9 = 72. ✓
Watch out. Know your 9 times table facts, then division is quick.
Key words. Column addition is a written method. You write the numbers one under the other, with ones under ones, tens under tens and so on, and add one column at a time. When a column adds up to 10 or more, you carry the tens into the next column.
Method. Write the numbers in columns with the same place values lined up. Add the ones first, then the tens, the hundreds and the thousands. If a column makes 10 or more, carry to the next column.
- Line up the digits in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens, hundreds under hundreds and thousands under thousands. Then every digit is added to a digit with the same value.
H T O 2 4 0 + 4 2 - Add the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.0 + 2 = 2
2 is less than 10, so write 2 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Add the tens. Now the next column to the left.4 + 4 = 8
8 is less than 10, so write 8 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Bring down the hundreds digit. The other number has no digit in this column, so there is nothing to add.There is only one digit here, so write 2 in the hundreds column.
- Read the answer. Check the answer has the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 2 4 0 + 4 2 2 8 2
240 + 42 = 282
Check. Use the opposite (inverse) operation: 282 − 42 = 240. ✓
Estimate: 240 + 40 = 280 (rounding to the nearest 10). It is close to the exact answer. ✓
Watch out. Line up the digits on the RIGHT, so ones are under ones. Do not line up the numbers on the left.
Key words. A known fact is a multiplication fact you can already recall. A derived fact is a new fact you work out from a known fact.
Method. Use the fact you know, 3 × 4 = 12, and place value. 40 is 4 tens, so the answer is 12 tens.
- Spot the fact you know. Take away the zeros and look at the digits that are left.3 × 4 = 12
- Say the bigger number in tens. 40 is 4 tens.40 = 4 tens
- Multiply, using the known fact. 4 tens × 3 = 12 tens, because 4 × 3 = 12.4 × 3 = 12, so 4 tens × 3 = 12 tens
- Change 12 tens back to a number. 1 ten is 10, so 12 tens is 12 × 10. 12 tens = 120
- Write the answer. 3 × 40 = 120
Check. Divide back: 120 ÷ 40 = 3. ✓
Watch out. The answer is 12 tens, which has 1 zero on the end. Count the zeros carefully.
Method. There are 8 equal groups, so multiply the number in one group by the number of groups.
- Draw a bar model. 8 equal bars show 8 equal boxes. Each bar is 6. We want the total.
- Choose the operation. Equal groups: multiply the number of groups by the amount in each group.8 × 6
- Work it out. Use a times table trick.6 + 6 = 12
double 10 = 20, double 2 = 4, so 20 + 4 = 24
double 20 = 40, double 4 = 8, so 40 + 8 = 48
8 × 6 = 48 - Write the answer. Include the unit.48 eggs
Check. Divide back: 48 ÷ 8 = 6. ✓
Watch out. Check that you multiplied. Equal groups mean the total is bigger than the size of one group.
Multiplying and dividing by 10 and 100
Printable: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · Open this lesson on its own page
Each column in a number is worth ten times the column on its right. Ones, tens, hundreds, thousands: every step to the left makes the value ten times bigger. That is why multiplying and dividing by 10 and 100 is so quick. You only have to move the digits.
Multiplying by 10. Take 34. It is 3 tens and 4 ones. Multiply by 10 and every digit becomes ten times bigger. 3 tens become 3 hundreds. 4 ones become 4 tens. Every digit moves one place to the left. That leaves the ones place empty, so we fill it with a 0. So 34 × 10 = 340.
Multiplying by 100 makes every digit 100 times bigger. Every digit moves two places to the left and two zeros fill the gaps. 52 × 100 = 5,200. It is the same as multiplying by 10 and then by 10 again.
Dividing is the opposite. Dividing by 10 makes every digit ten times smaller, so each digit moves one place to the right. Dividing by 100 moves each digit two places to the right. In this chapter the numbers divide exactly, which means they end in enough zeros. 4,500 ÷ 100 = 45.
The zero is a place holder. You may have heard “just add a zero”. That is not the real rule. The digits move, and the zero only holds the empty place so that the other digits stay in the right columns. This matters: 305 × 10 = 3,050, and when you divide, only the zeros at the end fall off: 3,050 ÷ 10 = 305.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value is what each digit is worth.
Key ideas
- × 10: every digit moves 1 place to the left. Put a 0 in the ones place.
- × 100: every digit moves 2 places to the left. Put 0 in the tens and ones places.
- ÷ 10: every digit moves 1 place to the right. (The number must end in 0.)
- ÷ 100: every digit moves 2 places to the right. (The number must end in 00.)
- × 100 is the same as × 10 and then × 10 again.
- Multiplying and dividing undo each other: 34 × 10 = 340 and 340 ÷ 10 = 34.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 10, move every digit 1 place to the left and put a zero in the empty place on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.3 tens
6 ones - Make every digit 10 times bigger. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger. That moves it 1 place to the left.3 tens become 3 hundreds
6 ones become 6 tens - Show it in a place-value table. The 1 gap on the right is empty, so we put a zero there.
- Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.36 × 10 = 360
Check. Divide back: 360 ÷ 10 = 36. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty place with a zero. Check the answer is 10 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 100, move every digit 2 places to the left and put 2 zeros in the empty places on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.4 tens
7 ones - Make every digit 100 times bigger. Multiplying by 100 makes each digit 100 times bigger. That moves it 2 places to the left.4 tens become 4 thousands
7 ones become 7 hundreds - Show it in a place-value table. The 2 gaps on the right are empty, so we put zeros there.
- Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.47 × 100 = 4,700
Check. Divide back: 4,700 ÷ 100 = 47. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty places with zeros. Check the answer is 100 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. A number that ends in 1 zero will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 1 zero? Every digit moves 1 place to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 1 zero divides exactly.520 ends in 1 zero. ✓
- Make every digit 10 times smaller. Dividing by 10 makes each digit 10 times smaller. That moves it 1 place to the right.5 hundreds become 5 tens
2 tens become 2 ones - Show it in a place-value table. The last 1 zero falls off the end.
Th H T O 520 5 2 0 ÷ 10 → 1 place right 52 5 2 - Write the answer. 520 ÷ 10 = 52
Check. Multiply back: 52 × 10 = 520. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 1 place to the right. Check the answer is 10 times smaller.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. A number that ends in 2 zeros will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 2 zeros? Every digit moves 2 places to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 2 zeros divides exactly.3,400 ends in 2 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 100 times smaller. Dividing by 100 makes each digit 100 times smaller. That moves it 2 places to the right.3 thousands become 3 tens
4 hundreds become 4 ones - Show it in a place-value table. The last 2 zeros fall off the end.
Th H T O 3,400 3 4 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 34 3 4 - Write the answer. 3,400 ÷ 100 = 34
Check. Multiply back: 34 × 100 = 3,400. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 2 places to the right. Check the answer is 100 times smaller.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 10, move every digit 1 place to the left and put a zero in the empty place on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.3 hundreds
5 ones - Make every digit 10 times bigger. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger. That moves it 1 place to the left.3 hundreds become 3 thousands
5 ones become 5 tens - Show it in a place-value table. The 1 gap on the right is empty, so we put a zero there.
Th H T O 305 3 0 5 × 10 ← 1 place left 3,050 3 0 5 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.305 × 10 = 3,050
Check. Divide back: 3,050 ÷ 10 = 305. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty place with a zero. Check the answer is 10 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. Find out how far the digits move. One place to the left is × 10. Two places to the left is × 100.
- Compare the two numbers. 45 is on one side, 4,500 is the answer.45 → 4,500
- Count how many places the digits moved. Each digit of 45 moved to the left. Count the places.
Th H T O 45 4 5 × 100 ← 2 places left 4,500 4 5 0 0 - Say what the number is. Digits that move 2 places to the left mean × 100.45 × 100 = 4,500
Check. 45 × 100 = 4,500. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 100, move every digit 2 places to the left and put 2 zeros in the empty places on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Choose the operation. Each packet holds 100 stickers, so we multiply the number of packets by 100.28 × 100
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.2 tens
8 ones - Make every digit 100 times bigger. Multiplying by 100 makes each digit 100 times bigger. That moves it 2 places to the left.2 tens become 2 thousands
8 ones become 8 hundreds - Show it in a place-value table. The 2 gaps on the right are empty, so we put zeros there.
Th H T O 28 2 8 × 100 ← 2 places left 2,800 2 8 0 0 - Write the answer. Include the unit.2,800 stickers
Check. Divide back: 2,800 ÷ 100 = 28. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty places with zeros. Check the answer is 100 times bigger.
Watch out
Do not just “add a zero” or “take away a zero”. Think about the digits moving. To multiply by 100, move two places (two zeros). To divide by 10, take off one zero only: 600 ÷ 10 = 60, not 6. And a zero inside a number stays: 305 × 10 = 3,050.Exercise 4A Multiplying and dividing by 10 and 100
Non-calculatorKey words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 10, move every digit 1 place to the left and put a zero in the empty place on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.8 ones
- Make every digit 10 times bigger. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger. That moves it 1 place to the left.8 ones become 8 tens
- Show it in a place-value table. The 1 gap on the right is empty, so we put a zero there.
Th H T O 8 8 × 10 ← 1 place left 80 8 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.8 × 10 = 80
Check. Divide back: 80 ÷ 10 = 8. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty place with a zero. Check the answer is 10 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 10, move every digit 1 place to the left and put a zero in the empty place on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.2 tens
3 ones - Make every digit 10 times bigger. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger. That moves it 1 place to the left.2 tens become 2 hundreds
3 ones become 3 tens - Show it in a place-value table. The 1 gap on the right is empty, so we put a zero there.
Th H T O 23 2 3 × 10 ← 1 place left 230 2 3 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.23 × 10 = 230
Check. Divide back: 230 ÷ 10 = 23. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty place with a zero. Check the answer is 10 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 10, move every digit 1 place to the left and put a zero in the empty place on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.6 tens
5 ones - Make every digit 10 times bigger. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger. That moves it 1 place to the left.6 tens become 6 hundreds
5 ones become 5 tens - Show it in a place-value table. The 1 gap on the right is empty, so we put a zero there.
Th H T O 65 6 5 × 10 ← 1 place left 650 6 5 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.65 × 10 = 650
Check. Divide back: 650 ÷ 10 = 65. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty place with a zero. Check the answer is 10 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 10, move every digit 1 place to the left and put a zero in the empty place on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.9 tens
- Make every digit 10 times bigger. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger. That moves it 1 place to the left.9 tens become 9 hundreds
- Show it in a place-value table. The 1 gap on the right is empty, so we put a zero there.
Th H T O 90 9 0 × 10 ← 1 place left 900 9 0 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.90 × 10 = 900
Check. Divide back: 900 ÷ 10 = 90. ✓
Watch out. The zeros are place holders. Count them: 90 × 10 must end with 1 zero more than the zeros 90 already ends with.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 10, move every digit 1 place to the left and put a zero in the empty place on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.1 hundred
4 tens
7 ones - Make every digit 10 times bigger. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger. That moves it 1 place to the left.1 hundred becomes 1 thousand
4 tens become 4 hundreds
7 ones become 7 tens - Show it in a place-value table. The 1 gap on the right is empty, so we put a zero there.
Th H T O 147 1 4 7 × 10 ← 1 place left 1,470 1 4 7 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.147 × 10 = 1,470
Check. Divide back: 1,470 ÷ 10 = 147. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty place with a zero. Check the answer is 10 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 10, move every digit 1 place to the left and put a zero in the empty place on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.3 hundreds
8 tens - Make every digit 10 times bigger. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger. That moves it 1 place to the left.3 hundreds become 3 thousands
8 tens become 8 hundreds - Show it in a place-value table. The 1 gap on the right is empty, so we put a zero there.
Th H T O 380 3 8 0 × 10 ← 1 place left 3,800 3 8 0 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.380 × 10 = 3,800
Check. Divide back: 3,800 ÷ 10 = 380. ✓
Watch out. The zeros are place holders. Count them: 380 × 10 must end with 1 zero more than the zeros 380 already ends with.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 100, move every digit 2 places to the left and put 2 zeros in the empty places on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.4 ones
- Make every digit 100 times bigger. Multiplying by 100 makes each digit 100 times bigger. That moves it 2 places to the left.4 ones become 4 hundreds
- Show it in a place-value table. The 2 gaps on the right are empty, so we put zeros there.
Th H T O 4 4 × 100 ← 2 places left 400 4 0 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.4 × 100 = 400
Check. Divide back: 400 ÷ 100 = 4. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty places with zeros. Check the answer is 100 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 100, move every digit 2 places to the left and put 2 zeros in the empty places on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.1 ten
7 ones - Make every digit 100 times bigger. Multiplying by 100 makes each digit 100 times bigger. That moves it 2 places to the left.1 ten becomes 1 thousand
7 ones become 7 hundreds - Show it in a place-value table. The 2 gaps on the right are empty, so we put zeros there.
Th H T O 17 1 7 × 100 ← 2 places left 1,700 1 7 0 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.17 × 100 = 1,700
Check. Divide back: 1,700 ÷ 100 = 17. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty places with zeros. Check the answer is 100 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 100, move every digit 2 places to the left and put 2 zeros in the empty places on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.6 tens
- Make every digit 100 times bigger. Multiplying by 100 makes each digit 100 times bigger. That moves it 2 places to the left.6 tens become 6 thousands
- Show it in a place-value table. The 2 gaps on the right are empty, so we put zeros there.
Th H T O 60 6 0 × 100 ← 2 places left 6,000 6 0 0 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.60 × 100 = 6,000
Check. Divide back: 6,000 ÷ 100 = 60. ✓
Watch out. The zeros are place holders. Count them: 60 × 100 must end with 2 zeros more than the zeros 60 already ends with.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 100, move every digit 2 places to the left and put 2 zeros in the empty places on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.2 hundreds
5 ones - Make every digit 100 times bigger. Multiplying by 100 makes each digit 100 times bigger. That moves it 2 places to the left.2 hundreds become 2 ten thousands
5 ones become 5 hundreds - Show it in a place-value table. The 2 gaps on the right are empty, so we put zeros there.
TTh Th H T O 205 2 0 5 × 100 ← 2 places left 20,500 2 0 5 0 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.205 × 100 = 20,500
Check. Divide back: 20,500 ÷ 100 = 205. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty places with zeros. Check the answer is 100 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 100, move every digit 2 places to the left and put 2 zeros in the empty places on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.3 hundreds
8 ones - Make every digit 100 times bigger. Multiplying by 100 makes each digit 100 times bigger. That moves it 2 places to the left.3 hundreds become 3 ten thousands
8 ones become 8 hundreds - Show it in a place-value table. The 2 gaps on the right are empty, so we put zeros there.
TTh Th H T O 308 3 0 8 × 100 ← 2 places left 30,800 3 0 8 0 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.308 × 100 = 30,800
Check. Divide back: 30,800 ÷ 100 = 308. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty places with zeros. Check the answer is 100 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 100, move every digit 2 places to the left and put 2 zeros in the empty places on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.9 tens
9 ones - Make every digit 100 times bigger. Multiplying by 100 makes each digit 100 times bigger. That moves it 2 places to the left.9 tens become 9 thousands
9 ones become 9 hundreds - Show it in a place-value table. The 2 gaps on the right are empty, so we put zeros there.
Th H T O 99 9 9 × 100 ← 2 places left 9,900 9 9 0 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.99 × 100 = 9,900
Check. Divide back: 9,900 ÷ 100 = 99. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty places with zeros. Check the answer is 100 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. A number that ends in 1 zero will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 1 zero? Every digit moves 1 place to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 1 zero divides exactly.70 ends in 1 zero. ✓
- Make every digit 10 times smaller. Dividing by 10 makes each digit 10 times smaller. That moves it 1 place to the right.7 tens become 7 ones
- Show it in a place-value table. The last 1 zero falls off the end.
Th H T O 70 7 0 ÷ 10 → 1 place right 7 7 - Write the answer. 70 ÷ 10 = 7
Check. Multiply back: 7 × 10 = 70. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 1 place to the right. Check the answer is 10 times smaller.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. A number that ends in 1 zero will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 1 zero? Every digit moves 1 place to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 1 zero divides exactly.340 ends in 1 zero. ✓
- Make every digit 10 times smaller. Dividing by 10 makes each digit 10 times smaller. That moves it 1 place to the right.3 hundreds become 3 tens
4 tens become 4 ones - Show it in a place-value table. The last 1 zero falls off the end.
Th H T O 340 3 4 0 ÷ 10 → 1 place right 34 3 4 - Write the answer. 340 ÷ 10 = 34
Check. Multiply back: 34 × 10 = 340. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 1 place to the right. Check the answer is 10 times smaller.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. A number that ends in 1 zero will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 1 zero? Every digit moves 1 place to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 1 zero divides exactly.800 ends in 2 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 10 times smaller. Dividing by 10 makes each digit 10 times smaller. That moves it 1 place to the right.8 hundreds become 8 tens
- Show it in a place-value table. The last 1 zero falls off the end.
Th H T O 800 8 0 0 ÷ 10 → 1 place right 80 8 0 - Write the answer. 800 ÷ 10 = 80
Check. Multiply back: 80 × 10 = 800. ✓
Watch out. Take away 1 zero from the end. Do not take away every zero: 600 ÷ 10 is 60, not 6.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. A number that ends in 1 zero will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 1 zero? Every digit moves 1 place to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 1 zero divides exactly.1,250 ends in 1 zero. ✓
- Make every digit 10 times smaller. Dividing by 10 makes each digit 10 times smaller. That moves it 1 place to the right.1 thousand becomes 1 hundred
2 hundreds become 2 tens
5 tens become 5 ones - Show it in a place-value table. The last 1 zero falls off the end.
Th H T O 1,250 1 2 5 0 ÷ 10 → 1 place right 125 1 2 5 - Write the answer. 1,250 ÷ 10 = 125
Check. Multiply back: 125 × 10 = 1,250. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 1 place to the right. Check the answer is 10 times smaller.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. A number that ends in 1 zero will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 1 zero? Every digit moves 1 place to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 1 zero divides exactly.4,060 ends in 1 zero. ✓
- Make every digit 10 times smaller. Dividing by 10 makes each digit 10 times smaller. That moves it 1 place to the right.4 thousands become 4 hundreds
6 tens become 6 ones - Show it in a place-value table. The last 1 zero falls off the end.
Th H T O 4,060 4 0 6 0 ÷ 10 → 1 place right 406 4 0 6 - Write the answer. 4,060 ÷ 10 = 406
Check. Multiply back: 406 × 10 = 4,060. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 1 place to the right. Check the answer is 10 times smaller.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. A number that ends in 1 zero will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 1 zero? Every digit moves 1 place to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 1 zero divides exactly.9,000 ends in 3 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 10 times smaller. Dividing by 10 makes each digit 10 times smaller. That moves it 1 place to the right.9 thousands become 9 hundreds
- Show it in a place-value table. The last 1 zero falls off the end.
Th H T O 9,000 9 0 0 0 ÷ 10 → 1 place right 900 9 0 0 - Write the answer. 9,000 ÷ 10 = 900
Check. Multiply back: 900 × 10 = 9,000. ✓
Watch out. Take away 1 zero from the end. Do not take away every zero: 600 ÷ 10 is 60, not 6.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. A number that ends in 2 zeros will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 2 zeros? Every digit moves 2 places to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 2 zeros divides exactly.600 ends in 2 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 100 times smaller. Dividing by 100 makes each digit 100 times smaller. That moves it 2 places to the right.6 hundreds become 6 ones
- Show it in a place-value table. The last 2 zeros fall off the end.
Th H T O 600 6 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 6 6 - Write the answer. 600 ÷ 100 = 6
Check. Multiply back: 6 × 100 = 600. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 2 places to the right. Check the answer is 100 times smaller.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. A number that ends in 2 zeros will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 2 zeros? Every digit moves 2 places to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 2 zeros divides exactly.4,700 ends in 2 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 100 times smaller. Dividing by 100 makes each digit 100 times smaller. That moves it 2 places to the right.4 thousands become 4 tens
7 hundreds become 7 ones - Show it in a place-value table. The last 2 zeros fall off the end.
Th H T O 4,700 4 7 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 47 4 7 - Write the answer. 4,700 ÷ 100 = 47
Check. Multiply back: 47 × 100 = 4,700. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 2 places to the right. Check the answer is 100 times smaller.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. A number that ends in 2 zeros will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 2 zeros? Every digit moves 2 places to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 2 zeros divides exactly.3,000 ends in 3 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 100 times smaller. Dividing by 100 makes each digit 100 times smaller. That moves it 2 places to the right.3 thousands become 3 tens
- Show it in a place-value table. The last 2 zeros fall off the end.
Th H T O 3,000 3 0 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 30 3 0 - Write the answer. 3,000 ÷ 100 = 30
Check. Multiply back: 30 × 100 = 3,000. ✓
Watch out. Take away 2 zeros from the end. Do not take away every zero: 600 ÷ 10 is 60, not 6.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. A number that ends in 2 zeros will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 2 zeros? Every digit moves 2 places to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 2 zeros divides exactly.9,500 ends in 2 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 100 times smaller. Dividing by 100 makes each digit 100 times smaller. That moves it 2 places to the right.9 thousands become 9 tens
5 hundreds become 5 ones - Show it in a place-value table. The last 2 zeros fall off the end.
Th H T O 9,500 9 5 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 95 9 5 - Write the answer. 9,500 ÷ 100 = 95
Check. Multiply back: 95 × 100 = 9,500. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 2 places to the right. Check the answer is 100 times smaller.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. A number that ends in 2 zeros will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 2 zeros? Every digit moves 2 places to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 2 zeros divides exactly.7,200 ends in 2 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 100 times smaller. Dividing by 100 makes each digit 100 times smaller. That moves it 2 places to the right.7 thousands become 7 tens
2 hundreds become 2 ones - Show it in a place-value table. The last 2 zeros fall off the end.
Th H T O 7,200 7 2 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 72 7 2 - Write the answer. 7,200 ÷ 100 = 72
Check. Multiply back: 72 × 100 = 7,200. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 2 places to the right. Check the answer is 100 times smaller.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. A number that ends in 2 zeros will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 2 zeros? Every digit moves 2 places to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 2 zeros divides exactly.8,000 ends in 3 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 100 times smaller. Dividing by 100 makes each digit 100 times smaller. That moves it 2 places to the right.8 thousands become 8 tens
- Show it in a place-value table. The last 2 zeros fall off the end.
Th H T O 8,000 8 0 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 80 8 0 - Write the answer. 8,000 ÷ 100 = 80
Check. Multiply back: 80 × 100 = 8,000. ✓
Watch out. Take away 2 zeros from the end. Do not take away every zero: 600 ÷ 10 is 60, not 6.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 10, move every digit 1 place to the left and put a zero in the empty place on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.5 tens
6 ones - Make every digit 10 times bigger. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger. That moves it 1 place to the left.5 tens become 5 hundreds
6 ones become 6 tens - Show it in a place-value table. The 1 gap on the right is empty, so we put a zero there.
Th H T O 56 5 6 × 10 ← 1 place left 560 5 6 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.56 × 10 = 560
Check. Divide back: 560 ÷ 10 = 56. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty place with a zero. Check the answer is 10 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. A number that ends in 1 zero will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 1 zero? Every digit moves 1 place to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 1 zero divides exactly.300 ends in 2 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 10 times smaller. Dividing by 10 makes each digit 10 times smaller. That moves it 1 place to the right.3 hundreds become 3 tens
- Show it in a place-value table. The last 1 zero falls off the end.
Th H T O 300 3 0 0 ÷ 10 → 1 place right 30 3 0 - Write the answer. 300 ÷ 10 = 30
Check. Multiply back: 30 × 10 = 300. ✓
Watch out. Take away 1 zero from the end. Do not take away every zero: 600 ÷ 10 is 60, not 6.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 100, move every digit 2 places to the left and put 2 zeros in the empty places on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.7 ones
- Make every digit 100 times bigger. Multiplying by 100 makes each digit 100 times bigger. That moves it 2 places to the left.7 ones become 7 hundreds
- Show it in a place-value table. The 2 gaps on the right are empty, so we put zeros there.
Th H T O 7 7 × 100 ← 2 places left 700 7 0 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.7 × 100 = 700
Check. Divide back: 700 ÷ 100 = 7. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty places with zeros. Check the answer is 100 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. A number that ends in 2 zeros will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 2 zeros? Every digit moves 2 places to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 2 zeros divides exactly.2,900 ends in 2 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 100 times smaller. Dividing by 100 makes each digit 100 times smaller. That moves it 2 places to the right.2 thousands become 2 tens
9 hundreds become 9 ones - Show it in a place-value table. The last 2 zeros fall off the end.
Th H T O 2,900 2 9 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 29 2 9 - Write the answer. 2,900 ÷ 100 = 29
Check. Multiply back: 29 × 100 = 2,900. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 2 places to the right. Check the answer is 100 times smaller.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 10, move every digit 1 place to the left and put a zero in the empty place on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.4 hundreds
1 ten - Make every digit 10 times bigger. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger. That moves it 1 place to the left.4 hundreds become 4 thousands
1 ten becomes 1 hundred - Show it in a place-value table. The 1 gap on the right is empty, so we put a zero there.
Th H T O 410 4 1 0 × 10 ← 1 place left 4,100 4 1 0 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.410 × 10 = 4,100
Check. Divide back: 4,100 ÷ 10 = 410. ✓
Watch out. The zeros are place holders. Count them: 410 × 10 must end with 1 zero more than the zeros 410 already ends with.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. A number that ends in 1 zero will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 1 zero? Every digit moves 1 place to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 1 zero divides exactly.6,000 ends in 3 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 10 times smaller. Dividing by 10 makes each digit 10 times smaller. That moves it 1 place to the right.6 thousands become 6 hundreds
- Show it in a place-value table. The last 1 zero falls off the end.
Th H T O 6,000 6 0 0 0 ÷ 10 → 1 place right 600 6 0 0 - Write the answer. 6,000 ÷ 10 = 600
Check. Multiply back: 600 × 10 = 6,000. ✓
Watch out. Take away 1 zero from the end. Do not take away every zero: 600 ÷ 10 is 60, not 6.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 100, move every digit 2 places to the left and put 2 zeros in the empty places on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.8 tens
3 ones - Make every digit 100 times bigger. Multiplying by 100 makes each digit 100 times bigger. That moves it 2 places to the left.8 tens become 8 thousands
3 ones become 3 hundreds - Show it in a place-value table. The 2 gaps on the right are empty, so we put zeros there.
Th H T O 83 8 3 × 100 ← 2 places left 8,300 8 3 0 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.83 × 100 = 8,300
Check. Divide back: 8,300 ÷ 100 = 83. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty places with zeros. Check the answer is 100 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. A number that ends in 2 zeros will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 2 zeros? Every digit moves 2 places to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 2 zeros divides exactly.500 ends in 2 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 100 times smaller. Dividing by 100 makes each digit 100 times smaller. That moves it 2 places to the right.5 hundreds become 5 ones
- Show it in a place-value table. The last 2 zeros fall off the end.
Th H T O 500 5 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 5 5 - Write the answer. 500 ÷ 100 = 5
Check. Multiply back: 5 × 100 = 500. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 2 places to the right. Check the answer is 100 times smaller.
Method. Look at where the digits start and where they finish. The direction and the number of places tell you whether it is multiply or divide, and by what.
- Read the top number and the bottom number. The top row is the starting number. The bottom row is the answer.Top: 38. Bottom: 380.
- Look at the arrows. The digits move 1 place to the left. Moving to the left makes numbers bigger.1 place to the left means × 10.
- Write the calculation. 38 × 10 = 380
Check. Divide back: 380 ÷ 10 = 38. ✓
Watch out. Digits moving to the left means multiply. Digits moving to the right means divide.
Method. Look at where the digits start and where they finish. The direction and the number of places tell you whether it is multiply or divide, and by what.
- Read the top number and the bottom number. The top row is the starting number. The bottom row is the answer.Top: 6,700. Bottom: 67.
- Look at the arrows. The digits move 2 places to the right. Moving to the right makes numbers smaller.2 places to the right means ÷ 100.
- Write the calculation. 6,700 ÷ 100 = 67
Check. Multiply back: 67 × 100 = 6,700. ✓
Watch out. Digits moving to the left means multiply. Digits moving to the right means divide.
Method. Look at where the digits start and where they finish. The direction and the number of places tell you whether it is multiply or divide, and by what.
- Read the top number and the bottom number. The top row is the starting number. The bottom row is the answer.Top: 52. Bottom: 5,200.
- Look at the arrows. The digits move 2 places to the left. Moving to the left makes numbers bigger.2 places to the left means × 100.
- Write the calculation. 52 × 100 = 5,200
Check. Divide back: 5,200 ÷ 100 = 52. ✓
Watch out. Digits moving to the left means multiply. Digits moving to the right means divide.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. Find out how far the digits move. One place to the left is × 10. Two places to the left is × 100.
- Compare the two numbers. 45 is on one side, 4,500 is the answer.45 → 4,500
- Count how many places the digits moved. Each digit of 45 moved to the left. Count the places.
Th H T O 45 4 5 × 100 ← 2 places left 4,500 4 5 0 0 - Say what the number is. Digits that move 2 places to the left mean × 100.45 × 100 = 4,500
Check. 45 × 100 = 4,500. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. Find out how far the digits move. One place to the left is × 10. Two places to the left is × 100.
- Compare the two numbers. 8 is on one side, 80 is the answer.8 → 80
- Count how many places the digits moved. Each digit of 8 moved to the left. Count the places.
Th H T O 8 8 × 10 ← 1 place left 80 8 0 - Say what the number is. Digits that move 1 place to the left mean × 10.8 × 10 = 80
Check. 8 × 10 = 80. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. Multiplying and dividing undo each other. Divide the answer by 10 to find the missing number.
- Use the opposite (inverse) operation. ? × 10 = 370, so 370 ÷ 10 gives the missing number.370 ÷ 10
- Move the digits 1 place to the right. Dividing by 10 makes each digit 10 times smaller.
Th H T O 370 3 7 0 ÷ 10 → 1 place right 37 3 7 - Write the missing number. 37 × 10 = 370
Check. 37 × 10 = 370. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. Multiplying and dividing undo each other. Divide the answer by 100 to find the missing number.
- Use the opposite (inverse) operation. ? × 100 = 6,200, so 6,200 ÷ 100 gives the missing number.6,200 ÷ 100
- Move the digits 2 places to the right. Dividing by 100 makes each digit 100 times smaller.
Th H T O 6,200 6 2 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 62 6 2 - Write the missing number. 62 × 100 = 6,200
Check. 62 × 100 = 6,200. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. Multiplying and dividing undo each other. Multiply 54 by 10 to find the missing number.
- Use the opposite (inverse) operation. The missing number is 10 times bigger than 54.54 × 10
- Move the digits 1 place to the left. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger.
Th H T O 54 5 4 × 10 ← 1 place left 540 5 4 0 - Write the missing number. 540 ÷ 10 = 54
Check. 540 ÷ 10 = 54. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. Find out how far the digits move. One place to the right is ÷ 10. Two places to the right is ÷ 100.
- Compare the two numbers. 900 is divided by the missing number to make 9.900 → 9
- Count how many places the digits moved. Each digit of 900 moved to the right.
Th H T O 900 9 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 9 9 - Say what the number is. Digits that move 2 places to the right mean ÷ 100.900 ÷ 100 = 9
Check. 9 × 100 = 900. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 10, move every digit 1 place to the left and put a zero in the empty place on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.7 tens
6 ones - Make every digit 10 times bigger. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger. That moves it 1 place to the left.7 tens become 7 hundreds
6 ones become 6 tens - Show it in a place-value table. The 1 gap on the right is empty, so we put a zero there.
Th H T O 76 7 6 × 10 ← 1 place left 760 7 6 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.76 × 10 = 760
Check. Divide back: 760 ÷ 10 = 76. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty place with a zero. Check the answer is 10 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 100, move every digit 2 places to the left and put 2 zeros in the empty places on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.9 ones
- Make every digit 100 times bigger. Multiplying by 100 makes each digit 100 times bigger. That moves it 2 places to the left.9 ones become 9 hundreds
- Show it in a place-value table. The 2 gaps on the right are empty, so we put zeros there.
Th H T O 9 9 × 100 ← 2 places left 900 9 0 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.9 × 100 = 900
Check. Divide back: 900 ÷ 100 = 9. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty places with zeros. Check the answer is 100 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. A number that ends in 1 zero will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 1 zero? Every digit moves 1 place to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 1 zero divides exactly.830 ends in 1 zero. ✓
- Make every digit 10 times smaller. Dividing by 10 makes each digit 10 times smaller. That moves it 1 place to the right.8 hundreds become 8 tens
3 tens become 3 ones - Show it in a place-value table. The last 1 zero falls off the end.
Th H T O 830 8 3 0 ÷ 10 → 1 place right 83 8 3 - Write the answer. 830 ÷ 10 = 83
Check. Multiply back: 83 × 10 = 830. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 1 place to the right. Check the answer is 10 times smaller.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. A number that ends in 2 zeros will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 2 zeros? Every digit moves 2 places to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 2 zeros divides exactly.6,100 ends in 2 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 100 times smaller. Dividing by 100 makes each digit 100 times smaller. That moves it 2 places to the right.6 thousands become 6 tens
1 hundred becomes 1 one - Show it in a place-value table. The last 2 zeros fall off the end.
Th H T O 6,100 6 1 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 61 6 1 - Write the answer. 6,100 ÷ 100 = 61
Check. Multiply back: 61 × 100 = 6,100. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 2 places to the right. Check the answer is 100 times smaller.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 10, move every digit 1 place to the left and put a zero in the empty place on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Choose the operation. There are 10 pencils in each box, so we multiply the number of boxes by 10.85 × 10
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.8 tens
5 ones - Make every digit 10 times bigger. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger. That moves it 1 place to the left.8 tens become 8 hundreds
5 ones become 5 tens - Show it in a place-value table. The 1 gap on the right is empty, so we put a zero there.
Th H T O 85 8 5 × 10 ← 1 place left 850 8 5 0 - Write the answer. Include the unit.850 pencils
Check. Divide back: 850 ÷ 10 = 85. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty place with a zero. Check the answer is 10 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 10, move every digit 1 place to the left and put a zero in the empty place on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Choose the operation. Each sweet costs 10p, so we multiply the number of sweets by 10.64p × 10
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.6 tens
4 ones - Make every digit 10 times bigger. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger. That moves it 1 place to the left.6 tens become 6 hundreds
4 ones become 4 tens - Show it in a place-value table. The 1 gap on the right is empty, so we put a zero there.
Th H T O 64 6 4 × 10 ← 1 place left 640 6 4 0 - Write the answer. Include the unit.640p
Check. Divide back: 640 ÷ 10 = 64. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty place with a zero. Check the answer is 10 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. A number that ends in 2 zeros will divide exactly.
- Choose the operation. 100 cm make 1 m, so we divide the number of centimetres by 100.3,500 ÷ 100
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 2 zeros? Every digit moves 2 places to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 2 zeros divides exactly.3,500 ends in 2 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 100 times smaller. Dividing by 100 makes each digit 100 times smaller. That moves it 2 places to the right.3 thousands become 3 tens
5 hundreds become 5 ones - Show it in a place-value table. The last 2 zeros fall off the end.
Th H T O 3,500 3 5 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 35 3 5 - Write the answer. Include the unit.35 m
Check. Multiply back: 35 × 100 = 3,500. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 2 places to the right. Check the answer is 100 times smaller.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. Zainab said she “took away both zeros”. Check by moving the digits.
- Move the digits for ÷ 10. Dividing by 10 moves every digit one place to the right.
Th H T O 700 7 0 0 ÷ 10 → 1 place right 70 7 0 - Read the answer. 700 ÷ 10 = 70. Zainab took off two zeros, which is dividing by 100.700 ÷ 10 = 70, and 700 ÷ 100 = 7
- Answer Zainab. No. The answer is 70.
Check. Multiply back: 70 × 10 = 700. ✓
Watch out. Dividing by 10 takes off ONE zero. Dividing by 100 takes off two.
Method. Think about where the digits go when you multiply a whole number by 10.
- Try some numbers. Multiply by 10 and look at the last digit.7 × 10 = 70 45 × 10 = 450 300 × 10 = 3,000 1,234 × 10 = 12,340
- Explain why. Every digit moves one place to the left, so the ones place is empty. We always put a 0 there.
Th H T O 45 4 5 × 10 ← 1 place left 450 4 5 0 - Decide. Always
Check. Divide back: 450 ÷ 10 = 45. ✓
Watch out. “Always” means it works every time. Give a reason, not just examples.
Method. Work out each one. The odd one out has a different answer from the others.
- Work out A and B. Move the digits.5 × 100 = 500 and 50 × 10 = 500
- Work out C. 500 has two zeros, and one more zero goes on.500 × 10 = 5,000
- Work out D. Dividing by 10 takes one zero off.5,000 ÷ 10 = 500
- Choose the odd one out. A, B and D all make 500. C makes 5,000.C (500 × 10)
Check. 5,000 ÷ 10 = 500, so D is 500 and C is ten times bigger. ✓
Watch out. Check the sign (× or ÷) as well as the numbers.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. Multiplying and dividing undo each other. Divide the answer by 100 to find the missing number.
- Use the opposite (inverse) operation. ? × 100 = 6,300, so 6,300 ÷ 100 gives the missing number.6,300 ÷ 100
- Move the digits 2 places to the right. Dividing by 100 makes each digit 100 times smaller.
Th H T O 6,300 6 3 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 63 6 3 - Write the missing number. 63 × 100 = 6,300
Check. 63 × 100 = 6,300. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 10, move every digit 1 place to the right. A number that ends in 1 zero will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 1 zero? Every digit moves 1 place to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 1 zero divides exactly.6,300 ends in 2 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 10 times smaller. Dividing by 10 makes each digit 10 times smaller. That moves it 1 place to the right.6 thousands become 6 hundreds
3 hundreds become 3 tens - Show it in a place-value table. The last 1 zero falls off the end.
Th H T O 6,300 6 3 0 0 ÷ 10 → 1 place right 630 6 3 0 - Write the answer. 6,300 ÷ 10 = 630
Check. Multiply back: 630 × 10 = 6,300. ✓
Watch out. Take away 1 zero from the end. Do not take away every zero: 600 ÷ 10 is 60, not 6.
Partitioning, the grid method and the distributive law
Printable: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · Open this lesson on its own page
Big multiplications are easier when you partition the number. Partition means split it into parts: tens and ones, or hundreds, tens and ones. Imagine 6 packs with 34 stickers in each pack. 34 is 30 + 4. So 6 packs hold 6 lots of 30 and 6 lots of 4. 6 × 30 = 180 and 6 × 4 = 24. Add them: 180 + 24 = 204.
An area model is a rectangle split into parts. The length of each part is across the top, and the number on the side is the same for every part. The area of each part is a partial product. Add the partial products to get the total.
The distributive law. Splitting a number before you multiply always works. We write it like this:
34 × 6 = (30 + 4) × 6 = (30 × 6) + (4 × 6) = 180 + 24 = 204
That is the distributive law. You can do it in your head for two-digit numbers: multiply the tens, multiply the ones, then add.
Near a round number? If a number is just below a multiple of ten, you can multiply the round number and take some away. 29 × 6: 30 × 6 = 180, but 29 is one less than 30, so take away one lot of 6. 180 − 6 = 174.
The grid method for three-digit numbers. Do exactly the same with hundreds, tens and ones. 347 = 300 + 40 + 7. Put the parts in a grid and multiply each by 6.
| × | 300 | 40 | 7 |
| 6 | 300 × 61,800 | 40 × 6240 | 7 × 642 |
1,800 + 240 + 42 = 2,082. A zero digit makes no part: 305 = 300 + 5, so there are only two boxes.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit. A partial product is the answer to one part of the multiplication. The grid method puts the parts in a table.
Key ideas
- Partition the number: 34 = 30 + 4 and 347 = 300 + 40 + 7.
- Multiply each part by the one-digit number. Use a times table fact and put the zeros back.
- Add the partial products: this is the distributive law, (30 + 4) × 6 = 30 × 6 + 4 × 6.
- Near a round number? 29 × 6 = 30 × 6 − 6.
- A zero digit makes no part. Never skip a part that is not zero.
Key words. The distributive law says that (30 + 4) × 6 is the same as 30 × 6 + 4 × 6. You can split a number and multiply the parts.
Method. Partition the two-digit number into tens and ones. Multiply each part by the one-digit number and add the two answers. This is called the distributive law.
- Partition the number into tens and ones. Tens and ones are easy to multiply.34 = 30 + 4
- Write it as two multiplications. This is the distributive law: multiplying a sum by 6 is the same as multiplying each part by 6 and adding.34 × 6 = (30 + 4) × 6 = (30 × 6) + (4 × 6)
- Multiply the tens part. 3 × 6 = 18, so 3 tens × 6 = 18 tens.30 × 6 = 180
- Multiply the ones part. Use a times table fact.4 × 6 = 24
- Add the two answers. 180 + 24 = 204
Check. Estimate: 34 is about 30 (to the nearest 10). 30 × 6 = 180. Our answer, 204, is a bit more than 180, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Both parts must be multiplied by 6. A common mistake is to multiply only the tens, or only the ones.
Key words. The distributive law says that (30 + 4) × 6 is the same as 30 × 6 + 4 × 6. You can split a number and multiply the parts.
Method. Partition the two-digit number into tens and ones. Multiply each part by the one-digit number and add the two answers. This is called the distributive law.
- Partition the number into tens and ones. Tens and ones are easy to multiply.58 = 50 + 8
- Write it as two multiplications. This is the distributive law: multiplying a sum by 7 is the same as multiplying each part by 7 and adding.58 × 7 = (50 + 8) × 7 = (50 × 7) + (8 × 7)
- Multiply the tens part. 5 × 7 = 35, so 5 tens × 7 = 35 tens.50 × 7 = 350
- Multiply the ones part. Use a times table fact.8 × 7 = 56
- Add the two answers. 350 + 56 = 406
Check. Estimate: 58 is about 60 (to the nearest 10). 60 × 7 = 420. Our answer, 406, is a bit less than 420, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Both parts must be multiplied by 7. A common mistake is to multiply only the tens, or only the ones.
Key words. To compensate is to make up for a change. Here we multiply an easy number, then correct the answer.
Method. 49 is close to the round number 50. Multiply 50 first, then take away the extra bit.
- Spot a round number close by. 49 is just 1 below 50.49 = 50 − 1
- Multiply the round number by 6. Round numbers are easy to multiply.50 × 6 = 300
- Work out the extra bit: 1 × 6. We multiplied 50 by 6, but 49 is 1 less, so we have to take away 1 lots of 6.1 × 6 = 6
- Fix the answer. Take it away (or add it) to get to the real answer.300 − 6 = 294
Check. Partition instead: 49 = 40 + 9, and 240 + 54 = 294. ✓
Watch out. Take away 1 lots of 6, not just 1.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.47 = 40 + 7
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 8. Every part gets multiplied by 8.
× 40 7 8 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.7 × 8 = 56
40 is 4 tens. 4 × 8 = 32, so 4 tens × 8 = 32 tens = 320 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 40 7 8 40 × 8320 7 × 856 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.320 + 56 = 376
- Write the answer. 47 × 8 = 376
Check. Estimate: 47 is about 50 (to the nearest 10). 50 × 8 = 400. Our answer, 376, is a bit less than 400, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.325 = 300 + 20 + 5
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 4. Every part gets multiplied by 4.
× 300 20 5 4 ? ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.5 × 4 = 20
20 is 2 tens. 2 × 4 = 8, so 2 tens × 4 = 8 tens = 80
300 is 3 hundreds. 3 × 4 = 12, so 3 hundreds × 4 = 12 hundreds = 1,200 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 300 20 5 4 300 × 41,200 20 × 480 5 × 420 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.1,200 + 80 = 1,280
1,280 + 20 = 1,300 - Write the answer. 325 × 4 = 1,300
Check. Estimate: 325 is about 300 (to the nearest 100). 300 × 4 = 1,200. Our answer, 1,300, is a bit more than 1,200, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply. The 0 in the number means there are none of that place, so it has no part.406 = 400 + 6
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 7. Every part gets multiplied by 7.
× 400 6 7 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.6 × 7 = 42
400 is 4 hundreds. 4 × 7 = 28, so 4 hundreds × 7 = 28 hundreds = 2,800 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 400 6 7 400 × 72,800 6 × 742 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.2,800 + 42 = 2,842
- Write the answer. 406 × 7 = 2,842
Check. Estimate: 406 is about 400 (to the nearest 100). 400 × 7 = 2,800. Our answer, 2,842, is a bit more than 2,800, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Method. Partition the number into tens and ones, multiply each part by the one-digit number, and add the answers.
- Partition the number. Split 52 into tens and ones.52 = 50 + 2
- Write what each part makes. 50 × 7 = 350 and 2 × 7 = 14.(50 × 7) + (2 × 7) = 350 + 14
- Find the missing number. The tens part of 52 is 50. Multiply it by 7.50 × 7 = 350
Check. Total: 350 + 14 = 364, and 52 × 7 = 364. ✓
Watch out. Read the whole sentence with your answer in the box. It must be true.
Watch out
Multiply the whole value of each part. In 52 × 6, the 5 is worth 50, so work out 50 × 6 = 300, not 5 × 6 = 30. Also remember every part: if you only multiply the tens, you have forgotten the ones.Exercise 4B Partitioning, the grid method and the distributive law
Non-calculatorKey words. The distributive law says that (30 + 4) × 6 is the same as 30 × 6 + 4 × 6. You can split a number and multiply the parts.
Method. Partition the two-digit number into tens and ones. Multiply each part by the one-digit number and add the two answers. This is called the distributive law.
- Partition the number into tens and ones. Tens and ones are easy to multiply.23 = 20 + 3
- Write it as two multiplications. This is the distributive law: multiplying a sum by 3 is the same as multiplying each part by 3 and adding.23 × 3 = (20 + 3) × 3 = (20 × 3) + (3 × 3)
- Multiply the tens part. 2 × 3 = 6, so 2 tens × 3 = 6 tens.20 × 3 = 60
- Multiply the ones part. Use a times table fact.3 × 3 = 9
- Add the two answers. 60 + 9 = 69
Check. Estimate: 23 is about 20 (to the nearest 10). 20 × 3 = 60. Our answer, 69, is a bit more than 60, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Both parts must be multiplied by 3. A common mistake is to multiply only the tens, or only the ones.
Key words. The distributive law says that (30 + 4) × 6 is the same as 30 × 6 + 4 × 6. You can split a number and multiply the parts.
Method. Partition the two-digit number into tens and ones. Multiply each part by the one-digit number and add the two answers. This is called the distributive law.
- Partition the number into tens and ones. Tens and ones are easy to multiply.41 = 40 + 1
- Write it as two multiplications. This is the distributive law: multiplying a sum by 5 is the same as multiplying each part by 5 and adding.41 × 5 = (40 + 1) × 5 = (40 × 5) + (1 × 5)
- Multiply the tens part. 4 × 5 = 20, so 4 tens × 5 = 20 tens.40 × 5 = 200
- Multiply the ones part. Use a times table fact.1 × 5 = 5
- Add the two answers. 200 + 5 = 205
Check. Estimate: 41 is about 40 (to the nearest 10). 40 × 5 = 200. Our answer, 205, is a bit more than 200, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Both parts must be multiplied by 5. A common mistake is to multiply only the tens, or only the ones.
Key words. The distributive law says that (30 + 4) × 6 is the same as 30 × 6 + 4 × 6. You can split a number and multiply the parts.
Method. Partition the two-digit number into tens and ones. Multiply each part by the one-digit number and add the two answers. This is called the distributive law.
- Partition the number into tens and ones. Tens and ones are easy to multiply.32 = 30 + 2
- Write it as two multiplications. This is the distributive law: multiplying a sum by 4 is the same as multiplying each part by 4 and adding.32 × 4 = (30 + 2) × 4 = (30 × 4) + (2 × 4)
- Multiply the tens part. 3 × 4 = 12, so 3 tens × 4 = 12 tens.30 × 4 = 120
- Multiply the ones part. Use a times table fact.2 × 4 = 8
- Add the two answers. 120 + 8 = 128
Check. Estimate: 32 is about 30 (to the nearest 10). 30 × 4 = 120. Our answer, 128, is a bit more than 120, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Both parts must be multiplied by 4. A common mistake is to multiply only the tens, or only the ones.
Key words. The distributive law says that (30 + 4) × 6 is the same as 30 × 6 + 4 × 6. You can split a number and multiply the parts.
Method. Partition the two-digit number into tens and ones. Multiply each part by the one-digit number and add the two answers. This is called the distributive law.
- Partition the number into tens and ones. Tens and ones are easy to multiply.54 = 50 + 4
- Write it as two multiplications. This is the distributive law: multiplying a sum by 6 is the same as multiplying each part by 6 and adding.54 × 6 = (50 + 4) × 6 = (50 × 6) + (4 × 6)
- Multiply the tens part. 5 × 6 = 30, so 5 tens × 6 = 30 tens.50 × 6 = 300
- Multiply the ones part. Use a times table fact.4 × 6 = 24
- Add the two answers. 300 + 24 = 324
Check. Estimate: 54 is about 50 (to the nearest 10). 50 × 6 = 300. Our answer, 324, is a bit more than 300, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Both parts must be multiplied by 6. A common mistake is to multiply only the tens, or only the ones.
Key words. The distributive law says that (30 + 4) × 6 is the same as 30 × 6 + 4 × 6. You can split a number and multiply the parts.
Method. Partition the two-digit number into tens and ones. Multiply each part by the one-digit number and add the two answers. This is called the distributive law.
- Partition the number into tens and ones. Tens and ones are easy to multiply.67 = 60 + 7
- Write it as two multiplications. This is the distributive law: multiplying a sum by 3 is the same as multiplying each part by 3 and adding.67 × 3 = (60 + 7) × 3 = (60 × 3) + (7 × 3)
- Multiply the tens part. 6 × 3 = 18, so 6 tens × 3 = 18 tens.60 × 3 = 180
- Multiply the ones part. Use a times table fact.7 × 3 = 21
- Add the two answers. 180 + 21 = 201
Check. Estimate: 67 is about 70 (to the nearest 10). 70 × 3 = 210. Our answer, 201, is a bit less than 210, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Both parts must be multiplied by 3. A common mistake is to multiply only the tens, or only the ones.
Key words. The distributive law says that (30 + 4) × 6 is the same as 30 × 6 + 4 × 6. You can split a number and multiply the parts.
Method. Partition the two-digit number into tens and ones. Multiply each part by the one-digit number and add the two answers. This is called the distributive law.
- Partition the number into tens and ones. Tens and ones are easy to multiply.76 = 70 + 6
- Write it as two multiplications. This is the distributive law: multiplying a sum by 8 is the same as multiplying each part by 8 and adding.76 × 8 = (70 + 6) × 8 = (70 × 8) + (6 × 8)
- Multiply the tens part. 7 × 8 = 56, so 7 tens × 8 = 56 tens.70 × 8 = 560
- Multiply the ones part. Use a times table fact.6 × 8 = 48
- Add the two answers. 560 + 48 = 608
Check. Estimate: 76 is about 80 (to the nearest 10). 80 × 8 = 640. Our answer, 608, is a bit less than 640, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Both parts must be multiplied by 8. A common mistake is to multiply only the tens, or only the ones.
Method. Partition the number into tens and ones, multiply each part by the one-digit number, and add the answers.
- Partition the number. Split 27 into tens and ones.27 = 20 + 7
- Write what each part makes. 20 × 4 = 80 and 7 × 4 = 28.(20 × 4) + (7 × 4) = 80 + 28
- Find the missing number. 27 = 20 + 7, so the missing part is the ones digit.27 = 20 + 7
Check. Total: 80 + 28 = 108, and 27 × 4 = 108. ✓
Watch out. Read the whole sentence with your answer in the box. It must be true.
Method. Partition the number into tens and ones, multiply each part by the one-digit number, and add the answers.
- Partition the number. Split 36 into tens and ones.36 = 30 + 6
- Write what each part makes. 30 × 5 = 150 and 6 × 5 = 30.(30 × 5) + (6 × 5) = 150 + 30
- Find the missing number. The tens part of 36 is 30. Multiply it by 5.30 × 5 = 150
Check. Total: 150 + 30 = 180, and 36 × 5 = 180. ✓
Watch out. Read the whole sentence with your answer in the box. It must be true.
Method. Partition the number into tens and ones, multiply each part by the one-digit number, and add the answers.
- Partition the number. Split 58 into tens and ones.58 = 50 + 8
- Write what each part makes. 50 × 6 = 300 and 8 × 6 = 48.(50 × 6) + (8 × 6) = 300 + 48
- Find the missing number. The ones part of 58 is 8. Multiply it by 6.8 × 6 = 48
Check. Total: 300 + 48 = 348, and 58 × 6 = 348. ✓
Watch out. Read the whole sentence with your answer in the box. It must be true.
Method. Partition the number into tens and ones, multiply each part by the one-digit number, and add the answers.
- Partition the number. Split 43 into tens and ones.43 = 40 + 3
- Write what each part makes. 40 × 7 = 280 and 3 × 7 = 21.(40 × 7) + (3 × 7) = 280 + 21
- Find the missing number. Add the two partial products.280 + 21 = 301
Check. Total: 280 + 21 = 301, and 43 × 7 = 301. ✓
Watch out. Read the whole sentence with your answer in the box. It must be true.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.52 = 50 + 2
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 4. Every part gets multiplied by 4.
× 50 2 4 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.2 × 4 = 8
50 is 5 tens. 5 × 4 = 20, so 5 tens × 4 = 20 tens = 200 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 50 2 4 50 × 4200 2 × 48 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.200 + 8 = 208
- Write the answer. 52 × 4 = 208
Check. Estimate: 52 is about 50 (to the nearest 10). 50 × 4 = 200. Our answer, 208, is a bit more than 200, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.34 = 30 + 4
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 5. Every part gets multiplied by 5.
× 30 4 5 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.4 × 5 = 20
30 is 3 tens. 3 × 5 = 15, so 3 tens × 5 = 15 tens = 150 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 30 4 5 30 × 5150 4 × 520 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.150 + 20 = 170
- Write the answer. 34 × 5 = 170
Check. Estimate: 34 is about 30 (to the nearest 10). 30 × 5 = 150. Our answer, 170, is a bit more than 150, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.63 = 60 + 3
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 7. Every part gets multiplied by 7.
× 60 3 7 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.3 × 7 = 21
60 is 6 tens. 6 × 7 = 42, so 6 tens × 7 = 42 tens = 420 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 60 3 7 60 × 7420 3 × 721 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.420 + 21 = 441
- Write the answer. 63 × 7 = 441
Check. Estimate: 63 is about 60 (to the nearest 10). 60 × 7 = 420. Our answer, 441, is a bit more than 420, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To compensate is to make up for a change. Here we multiply an easy number, then correct the answer.
Method. 39 is close to the round number 40. Multiply 40 first, then take away the extra bit.
- Spot a round number close by. 39 is just 1 below 40.39 = 40 − 1
- Multiply the round number by 5. Round numbers are easy to multiply.40 × 5 = 200
- Work out the extra bit: 1 × 5. We multiplied 40 by 5, but 39 is 1 less, so we have to take away 1 lots of 5.1 × 5 = 5
- Fix the answer. Take it away (or add it) to get to the real answer.200 − 5 = 195
Check. Partition instead: 39 = 30 + 9, and 150 + 45 = 195. ✓
Watch out. Take away 1 lots of 5, not just 1.
Key words. To compensate is to make up for a change. Here we multiply an easy number, then correct the answer.
Method. 49 is close to the round number 50. Multiply 50 first, then take away the extra bit.
- Spot a round number close by. 49 is just 1 below 50.49 = 50 − 1
- Multiply the round number by 6. Round numbers are easy to multiply.50 × 6 = 300
- Work out the extra bit: 1 × 6. We multiplied 50 by 6, but 49 is 1 less, so we have to take away 1 lots of 6.1 × 6 = 6
- Fix the answer. Take it away (or add it) to get to the real answer.300 − 6 = 294
Check. Partition instead: 49 = 40 + 9, and 240 + 54 = 294. ✓
Watch out. Take away 1 lots of 6, not just 1.
Key words. To compensate is to make up for a change. Here we multiply an easy number, then correct the answer.
Method. 28 is close to the round number 30. Multiply 30 first, then take away the extra bit.
- Spot a round number close by. 28 is just 2 below 30.28 = 30 − 2
- Multiply the round number by 4. Round numbers are easy to multiply.30 × 4 = 120
- Work out the extra bit: 2 × 4. We multiplied 30 by 4, but 28 is 2 less, so we have to take away 2 lots of 4.2 × 4 = 8
- Fix the answer. Take it away (or add it) to get to the real answer.120 − 8 = 112
Check. Partition instead: 28 = 20 + 8, and 80 + 32 = 112. ✓
Watch out. Take away 2 lots of 4, not just 2.
Key words. To compensate is to make up for a change. Here we multiply an easy number, then correct the answer.
Method. 98 is close to the round number 100. Multiply 100 first, then take away the extra bit.
- Spot a round number close by. 98 is just 2 below 100.98 = 100 − 2
- Multiply the round number by 3. Round numbers are easy to multiply.100 × 3 = 300
- Work out the extra bit: 2 × 3. We multiplied 100 by 3, but 98 is 2 less, so we have to take away 2 lots of 3.2 × 3 = 6
- Fix the answer. Take it away (or add it) to get to the real answer.300 − 6 = 294
Check. Partition instead: 98 = 90 + 8, and 270 + 24 = 294. ✓
Watch out. Take away 2 lots of 3, not just 2.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.46 = 40 + 6
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 3. Every part gets multiplied by 3.
× 40 6 3 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.6 × 3 = 18
40 is 4 tens. 4 × 3 = 12, so 4 tens × 3 = 12 tens = 120 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 40 6 3 40 × 3120 6 × 318 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.120 + 18 = 138
- Write the answer. 46 × 3 = 138
Check. Estimate: 46 is about 50 (to the nearest 10). 50 × 3 = 150. Our answer, 138, is a bit less than 150, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.73 = 70 + 3
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 4. Every part gets multiplied by 4.
× 70 3 4 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.3 × 4 = 12
70 is 7 tens. 7 × 4 = 28, so 7 tens × 4 = 28 tens = 280 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 70 3 4 70 × 4280 3 × 412 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.280 + 12 = 292
- Write the answer. 73 × 4 = 292
Check. Estimate: 73 is about 70 (to the nearest 10). 70 × 4 = 280. Our answer, 292, is a bit more than 280, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.58 = 50 + 8
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 7. Every part gets multiplied by 7.
× 50 8 7 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.8 × 7 = 56
50 is 5 tens. 5 × 7 = 35, so 5 tens × 7 = 35 tens = 350 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 50 8 7 50 × 7350 8 × 756 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.350 + 56 = 406
- Write the answer. 58 × 7 = 406
Check. Estimate: 58 is about 60 (to the nearest 10). 60 × 7 = 420. Our answer, 406, is a bit less than 420, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.84 = 80 + 4
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 9. Every part gets multiplied by 9.
× 80 4 9 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.4 × 9 = 36
80 is 8 tens. 8 × 9 = 72, so 8 tens × 9 = 72 tens = 720 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 80 4 9 80 × 9720 4 × 936 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.720 + 36 = 756
- Write the answer. 84 × 9 = 756
Check. Estimate: 84 is about 80 (to the nearest 10). 80 × 9 = 720. Our answer, 756, is a bit more than 720, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.213 = 200 + 10 + 3
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 4. Every part gets multiplied by 4.
× 200 10 3 4 ? ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.3 × 4 = 12
10 is 1 ten. 1 × 4 = 4, so 1 ten × 4 = 4 tens = 40
200 is 2 hundreds. 2 × 4 = 8, so 2 hundreds × 4 = 8 hundreds = 800 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 200 10 3 4 200 × 4800 10 × 440 3 × 412 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.800 + 40 = 840
840 + 12 = 852 - Write the answer. 213 × 4 = 852
Check. Estimate: 213 is about 200 (to the nearest 100). 200 × 4 = 800. Our answer, 852, is a bit more than 800, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.325 = 300 + 20 + 5
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 3. Every part gets multiplied by 3.
× 300 20 5 3 ? ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.5 × 3 = 15
20 is 2 tens. 2 × 3 = 6, so 2 tens × 3 = 6 tens = 60
300 is 3 hundreds. 3 × 3 = 9, so 3 hundreds × 3 = 9 hundreds = 900 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 300 20 5 3 300 × 3900 20 × 360 5 × 315 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.900 + 60 = 960
960 + 15 = 975 - Write the answer. 325 × 3 = 975
Check. Estimate: 325 is about 300 (to the nearest 100). 300 × 3 = 900. Our answer, 975, is a bit more than 900, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.452 = 400 + 50 + 2
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 6. Every part gets multiplied by 6.
× 400 50 2 6 ? ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.2 × 6 = 12
50 is 5 tens. 5 × 6 = 30, so 5 tens × 6 = 30 tens = 300
400 is 4 hundreds. 4 × 6 = 24, so 4 hundreds × 6 = 24 hundreds = 2,400 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 400 50 2 6 400 × 62,400 50 × 6300 2 × 612 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.2,400 + 300 = 2,700
2,700 + 12 = 2,712 - Write the answer. 452 × 6 = 2,712
Check. Estimate: 452 is about 500 (to the nearest 100). 500 × 6 = 3,000. Our answer, 2,712, is a bit less than 3,000, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.678 = 600 + 70 + 8
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 5. Every part gets multiplied by 5.
× 600 70 8 5 ? ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.8 × 5 = 40
70 is 7 tens. 7 × 5 = 35, so 7 tens × 5 = 35 tens = 350
600 is 6 hundreds. 6 × 5 = 30, so 6 hundreds × 5 = 30 hundreds = 3,000 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 600 70 8 5 600 × 53,000 70 × 5350 8 × 540 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.3,000 + 350 = 3,350
3,350 + 40 = 3,390 - Write the answer. 678 × 5 = 3,390
Check. Estimate: 678 is about 700 (to the nearest 100). 700 × 5 = 3,500. Our answer, 3,390, is a bit less than 3,500, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply. The 0 in the number means there are none of that place, so it has no part.305 = 300 + 5
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 4. Every part gets multiplied by 4.
× 300 5 4 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.5 × 4 = 20
300 is 3 hundreds. 3 × 4 = 12, so 3 hundreds × 4 = 12 hundreds = 1,200 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 300 5 4 300 × 41,200 5 × 420 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.1,200 + 20 = 1,220
- Write the answer. 305 × 4 = 1,220
Check. Estimate: 305 is about 300 (to the nearest 100). 300 × 4 = 1,200. Our answer, 1,220, is a bit more than 1,200, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply. The 0 in the number means there are none of that place, so it has no part.620 = 600 + 20
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 3. Every part gets multiplied by 3.
× 600 20 3 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.20 is 2 tens. 2 × 3 = 6, so 2 tens × 3 = 6 tens = 60
600 is 6 hundreds. 6 × 3 = 18, so 6 hundreds × 3 = 18 hundreds = 1,800 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 600 20 3 600 × 31,800 20 × 360 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.1,800 + 60 = 1,860
- Write the answer. 620 × 3 = 1,860
Check. Estimate: 620 is about 600 (to the nearest 100). 600 × 3 = 1,800. Our answer, 1,860, is a bit more than 1,800, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Split the number into hundreds, tens and ones (partition it). Multiply each part by the one-digit number, then add the answers.
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply. The 0 in the number means there are none of that place, so it has no part.804 = 800 + 4
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 5. Every part gets multiplied by 5.
× 800 4 5 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.4 × 5 = 20
800 is 8 hundreds. 8 × 5 = 40, so 8 hundreds × 5 = 40 hundreds = 4,000 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 800 4 5 800 × 54,000 4 × 520 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.4,000 + 20 = 4,020
- Write the answer. 804 × 5 = 4,020
Check. Estimate: 804 is about 800 (to the nearest 100). 800 × 5 = 4,000. Our answer, 4,020, is a bit more than 4,000, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then use the grid method: split the number into parts, multiply each part and add.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows the equal groups.
- Choose the operation. There are 6 trays with 34 rolls on each, so multiply 34 by 6.34 × 6
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.34 = 30 + 4
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 6. Every part gets multiplied by 6.
× 30 4 6 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.4 × 6 = 24
30 is 3 tens. 3 × 6 = 18, so 3 tens × 6 = 18 tens = 180 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 30 4 6 30 × 6180 4 × 624 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.180 + 24 = 204
- Write the answer. Include the unit.204 rolls
Check. Estimate: 34 is about 30 (to the nearest 10). 30 × 6 = 180. Our answer, 204, is a bit more than 180, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then use the grid method: split the number into parts, multiply each part and add.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows the equal groups.
- Choose the operation. Each ticket costs £47, so multiply 47 by 6.£47 × 6
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.47 = 40 + 7
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 6. Every part gets multiplied by 6.
× 40 7 6 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.7 × 6 = 42
40 is 4 tens. 4 × 6 = 24, so 4 tens × 6 = 24 tens = 240 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 40 7 6 40 × 6240 7 × 642 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.240 + 42 = 282
- Write the answer. Include the unit.£282
Check. Estimate: 47 is about 50 (to the nearest 10). 50 × 6 = 300. Our answer, 282, is a bit less than 300, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Key words. To partition a number is to split it into parts, one for each digit (347 = 300 + 40 + 7). A partial product is the answer to one part of a multiplication. The grid method (or area method) puts the parts in a table and multiplies each part.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then use the grid method: split the number into parts, multiply each part and add.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows the equal groups.
- Choose the operation. Leo reads 28 pages each day for 7 days, so multiply 28 by 7.28 × 7
- Partition the number you are multiplying. Split it into hundreds, tens and ones. Each part is easy to multiply.28 = 20 + 8
- Draw the grid and write the parts across the top. The number on the side is 7. Every part gets multiplied by 7.
× 20 8 7 ? ? - Multiply each part. Use a times table fact, then put the zeros back.8 × 7 = 56
20 is 2 tens. 2 × 7 = 14, so 2 tens × 7 = 14 tens = 140 - Write each answer in the grid. These are the partial products.
× 20 8 7 20 × 7140 8 × 756 - Add the partial products. Add them one at a time, from the biggest. Keep a running total.140 + 56 = 196
- Write the answer. Include the unit.196 pages
Check. Estimate: 28 is about 30 (to the nearest 10). 30 × 7 = 210. Our answer, 196, is a bit less than 210, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget a part. Count the parts: every digit that is not 0 needs its own box. And keep the zeros: 40 × 6 is 240, not 24.
Method. Estimate first. Then work out the correct answer and find what Jack did wrong.
- Estimate 52 × 6. 52 is about 50. 50 × 6 is easy: 5 × 6 = 30, so 5 tens × 6 = 30 tens.50 × 6 = 300
- Compare with Jack’s answer. The answer should be a bit more than 300.Jack’s answer, 42, is much smaller than 300. It cannot be right.
- Find Jack’s mistake. He used 5 × 6 = 30 instead of 50 × 6 = 300. He forgot that the 5 means 5 tens.5 × 6 = 30 and 2 × 6 = 12, and 30 + 12 = 42
- Work out the correct answer. Multiply the whole value of each part.50 × 6 = 300, 2 × 6 = 12, 300 + 12 = 312
Check. Estimate: 52 is about 50 (to the nearest 10). 50 × 6 = 300. Our answer, 312, is a bit more than 300, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. In 52, the 5 is worth 50. Always multiply the whole value of the part.
Method. Try some two-digit numbers. Look for one that gives a 2-digit answer and one that gives a 3-digit answer.
- Try a small number. Use the partition method or the 5 times table.12 × 5 = 60 (2 digits)
- Try a bigger number. 24 × 5 = 120 (3 digits) 47 × 5 = 235 (3 digits)
- Find the turning point. 19 × 5 = 95 is still 2 digits, but 20 × 5 = 100 has 3 digits.19 × 5 = 95 20 × 5 = 100
- Decide. We found one that does and one that does not.Sometimes
Check. Numbers up to 19 give a 2-digit answer. Numbers from 20 to 99 give a 3-digit answer. ✓
Watch out. “Sometimes” needs an example that works and an example that does not.
Method. Work out both answers using the distributive law, then compare them.
- Work out 28 × 6. Partition 28 into 20 + 8.20 × 6 = 120 8 × 6 = 48 120 + 48 = 168
- Work out 34 × 5. Partition 34 into 30 + 4.30 × 5 = 150 4 × 5 = 20 150 + 20 = 170
- Compare. 170 is bigger than 168.170 > 168
- Answer. 34 × 5 is greater. It is only 2 more.
Check. Estimate: 30 × 6 = 180 and 30 × 5 = 150. The estimates are not enough to decide, so we needed the exact answers. ✓
Watch out. The numbers are very close, so an estimate is not enough. Work out both exactly.
Method. Try every way of using the three cards. Each card is used once: two make the two-digit number and one is the multiplier.
- List the possibilities. There are 6 ways: pick which card is the multiplier, then the order of the other two.57 × 3 = 171
37 × 5 = 185
75 × 3 = 225
35 × 7 = 245
73 × 5 = 365
53 × 7 = 371 - Find the biggest. Compare the answers.The biggest answer is 371, from 53 × 7.
Check. Work out 53 × 7 again: 50 × 7 = 350 and 3 × 7 = 21, so 350 + 21 = 371. ✓
Watch out. Check every possibility, not just the one that looks biggest. A smaller multiplier does not always lose.
Column multiplication: expanded and short
Printable: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · Open this lesson on its own page
The grid method works well, but it takes a lot of space. Column methods are tidier and quicker. We meet two of them. The first is the expanded column method. It is the grid written in a column. Multiply the ones, then the tens, then the hundreds. Write each answer on its own line, then add the lines.
Here is 347 × 6. The lines are 7 × 6 = 42, 40 × 6 = 240 and 300 × 6 = 1,800.
| 347 | ||
| × | 6 | |
| 42 | 7 × 6 | |
| 240 | 40 × 6 | |
| 1,800 | 300 × 6 | |
| 2,082 |
Notice that you multiply the whole value of each digit: the 4 is worth 40, so you work out 40 × 6.
The second method is short multiplication. It is the same sum, set out in a smaller space. You multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. If the answer is 10 or more, you write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column. You then add the carried digit after you have multiplied that column.
Let us do 347 × 6 again. 7 × 6 = 42: write 2, carry 4. 4 × 6 = 24, and 24 + 4 = 28: write 8, carry 2. 3 × 6 = 18, and 18 + 2 = 20: write 0, carry 2. There are no more digits, so write the carried 2. The answer is 2,082, the same as the expanded method.
| Th | H | T | O | |
| 3 | 4 | 7 | ||
| × | 6 | |||
| 2 | 0 | 8 | 2 | |
| 2 | 2 | 4 |
Estimate first. 347 is about 300, and 300 × 6 = 1,800. So the answer should be a bit more than 1,800. 2,082 is sensible.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method with a one-digit multiplier. To carry is to move the tens digit of an answer into the next column. The expanded method shows every partial product on its own line.
Key ideas
- Expanded method: multiply each part (7 × 6, 40 × 6, 300 × 6), then add the lines.
- Short multiplication: start with the ones, multiply each column, carry the tens digit.
- Add the carried digit AFTER you multiply the next column.
- Estimate first: round and multiply. Your answer should be close.
- A zero digit: 0 × the number is 0, but still add the carried digit.
Key words. The expanded method writes each partial product on its own line, so you can see every step. It leads to the short method.
Method. Multiply each digit of the number by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. Write each answer on its own line. Then add the lines.
- Write the numbers in a column. The number to multiply goes on top. The one-digit number goes underneath, on the right.
38 × 6 48 8 × 6 180 30 × 6 - Multiply the ones. Always start on the right.8 × 6 = 48
- Multiply the tens. The digit 3 is worth 30, so multiply 30 by 6, not just 3.30 is 3 tens. 3 × 6 = 18, so 3 tens × 6 = 18 tens = 180
- Add the lines together. Draw a line and add up the partial products.
38 × 6 48 8 × 6 180 30 × 6 228
48 + 180 = 228 - Write the answer. 38 × 6 = 228
Check. Estimate: 38 is about 40 (to the nearest 10). 40 × 6 = 240. Our answer, 228, is a bit less than 240, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Multiply the whole value of each digit: the 4 in 347 is worth 40, so work out 40 × 6, not 4 × 6.
Key words. The expanded method writes each partial product on its own line, so you can see every step. It leads to the short method.
Method. Multiply each digit of the number by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. Write each answer on its own line. Then add the lines.
- Write the numbers in a column. The number to multiply goes on top. The one-digit number goes underneath, on the right.
274 × 3 12 4 × 3 210 70 × 3 600 200 × 3 - Multiply the ones. Always start on the right.4 × 3 = 12
- Multiply the tens. The digit 7 is worth 70, so multiply 70 by 3, not just 7.70 is 7 tens. 7 × 3 = 21, so 7 tens × 3 = 21 tens = 210
- Multiply the hundreds. The digit 2 is worth 200, so multiply 200 by 3, not just 2.200 is 2 hundreds. 2 × 3 = 6, so 2 hundreds × 3 = 6 hundreds = 600
- Add the lines together. Draw a line and add up the partial products.
274 × 3 12 4 × 3 210 70 × 3 600 200 × 3 822
12 + 210 = 222
222 + 600 = 822 - Write the answer. 274 × 3 = 822
Check. Estimate: 274 is about 300 (to the nearest 100). 300 × 3 = 900. Our answer, 822, is a bit less than 900, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Multiply the whole value of each digit: the 4 in 347 is worth 40, so work out 40 × 6, not 4 × 6.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 3 8 × 6 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.8 × 6 = 48
48 is 4 tens and 8 ones. Write 8 in the ones column and carry 4 to the tens column.H T O 3 8 × 6 8 4 - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 4 we carried.3 × 6 = 18, and 18 + 4 (carried) = 22
22 is 2 hundreds and 2 tens. Write 2 in the tens column and carry 2 to the hundreds column.H T O 3 8 × 6 2 8 2 4 - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the hundreds column, but we carried 2 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 2 in the hundreds column.
H T O 3 8 × 6 2 2 8 2 4 - Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 3 8 × 6 2 2 8 2 4
38 × 6 = 228
Check. Estimate: 38 is about 40 (to the nearest 10). 40 × 6 = 240. Our answer, 228, is a bit less than 240, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 3 4 7 × 6 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.7 × 6 = 42
42 is 4 tens and 2 ones. Write 2 in the ones column and carry 4 to the tens column.Th H T O 3 4 7 × 6 2 4 - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 4 we carried.4 × 6 = 24, and 24 + 4 (carried) = 28
28 is 2 hundreds and 8 tens. Write 8 in the tens column and carry 2 to the hundreds column.Th H T O 3 4 7 × 6 8 2 2 4 - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 2 we carried.3 × 6 = 18, and 18 + 2 (carried) = 20
20 is 2 thousands and 0 hundreds. Write 0 in the hundreds column and carry 2 to the thousands column.Th H T O 3 4 7 × 6 0 8 2 2 2 4 - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 2 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 2 in the thousands column.
Th H T O 3 4 7 × 6 2 0 8 2 2 2 4 - Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
Th H T O 3 4 7 × 6 2 0 8 2 2 2 4
347 × 6 = 2,082
Check. Estimate: 347 is about 300 (to the nearest 100). 300 × 6 = 1,800. Our answer, 2,082, is a bit more than 1,800, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 5 2 8 × 4 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.8 × 4 = 32
32 is 3 tens and 2 ones. Write 2 in the ones column and carry 3 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 3 we carried.2 × 4 = 8, and 8 + 3 (carried) = 11
11 is 1 hundred and 1 ten. Write 1 in the tens column and carry 1 to the hundreds column. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 1 we carried.5 × 4 = 20, and 20 + 1 (carried) = 21
21 is 2 thousands and 1 hundred. Write 1 in the hundreds column and carry 2 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 2 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 2 in the thousands column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
Th H T O 5 2 8 × 4 2 1 1 2 2 1 3
528 × 4 = 2,112
Check. Estimate: 528 is about 500 (to the nearest 100). 500 × 4 = 2,000. Our answer, 2,112, is a bit more than 2,000, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 4 0 7 × 5 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.7 × 5 = 35
35 is 3 tens and 5 ones. Write 5 in the ones column and carry 3 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 3 we carried.0 × 5 = 0, and 0 + 3 (carried) = 3
3 is less than 10, so write 3 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left.4 × 5 = 20
20 is 2 thousands and 0 hundreds. Write 0 in the hundreds column and carry 2 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 2 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 2 in the thousands column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
Th H T O 4 0 7 × 5 2 0 3 5 2 3
407 × 5 = 2,035
Check. Estimate: 407 is about 400 (to the nearest 100). 400 × 5 = 2,000. Our answer, 2,035, is a bit more than 2,000, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. A zero digit still needs a step: 0 × the number is 0, but do not forget to add the carried digit.
Key words. To estimate is to find an answer that is close, usually by rounding first. ≈ means “is about equal to”.
Method. Round the big number and multiply to get an estimate. Then work out the exact answer with short multiplication and check that it is close to the estimate.
- Round 623 to the nearest 100. Rounded numbers are easy to multiply.623 ≈ 600 (the tens digit is 2, so round down)
- Work out the estimate. Multiply the rounded number by the one-digit number.600 × 4 = 2,400
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 6 2 3 × 4 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.3 × 4 = 12
12 is 1 ten and 2 ones. Write 2 in the ones column and carry 1 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 1 we carried.2 × 4 = 8, and 8 + 1 (carried) = 9
9 is less than 10, so write 9 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left.6 × 4 = 24
24 is 2 thousands and 4 hundreds. Write 4 in the hundreds column and carry 2 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 2 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 2 in the thousands column.
- Compare the exact answer with the estimate. They should be close.
Th H T O 6 2 3 × 4 2 4 9 2 2 1
Exact: 2,492. Estimate: 2,400. They are close. ✓
Check. Estimate: 623 is about 600 (to the nearest 100). 600 × 4 = 2,400. Our answer, 2,492, is a bit more than 2,400, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. An estimate is not the exact answer. It is a quick way to catch big mistakes.
Method. Estimate the answer to see if Priya’s answer is sensible. Then find the correct answer.
- Round 623 to the nearest 100. Rounded numbers are easy to multiply.623 ≈ 600 (the tens digit is 2, so round down)
- Work out the estimate. 6 × 4 = 24, so 6 hundreds × 4 = 24 hundreds.600 × 4 = 2,400
- Compare with Priya’s answer. The exact answer should be close to 2,400.Priya’s answer, 292, is far too small. It is not sensible.
- Work out the correct answer. Use short multiplication.
Th H T O 6 2 3 × 4 2 4 9 2 2 1
623 × 4 = 2,492
Check. Estimate: 623 is about 600 (to the nearest 100). 600 × 4 = 2,400. Our answer, 2,492, is a bit more than 2,400, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. If your answer is not close to the estimate, go back and check each column. Priya has lost a digit.
Watch out
Carry, then add. In 347 × 6, the 4 is multiplied by 6 first (24), and then you add the carried 4 (28). Do not add the carry before multiplying. Also write the carried digit small, in the next column, so you do not lose it. And keep every digit of the answer, including a 0.Exercise 4C Column multiplication: expanded and short
Non-calculatorKey words. The expanded method writes each partial product on its own line, so you can see every step. It leads to the short method.
Method. Multiply each digit of the number by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. Write each answer on its own line. Then add the lines.
- Write the numbers in a column. The number to multiply goes on top. The one-digit number goes underneath, on the right.
36 × 4 24 6 × 4 120 30 × 4 - Multiply the ones. Always start on the right.6 × 4 = 24
- Multiply the tens. The digit 3 is worth 30, so multiply 30 by 4, not just 3.30 is 3 tens. 3 × 4 = 12, so 3 tens × 4 = 12 tens = 120
- Add the lines together. Draw a line and add up the partial products.
36 × 4 24 6 × 4 120 30 × 4 144
24 + 120 = 144 - Write the answer. 36 × 4 = 144
Check. Estimate: 36 is about 40 (to the nearest 10). 40 × 4 = 160. Our answer, 144, is a bit less than 160, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Multiply the whole value of each digit: the 4 in 347 is worth 40, so work out 40 × 6, not 4 × 6.
Key words. The expanded method writes each partial product on its own line, so you can see every step. It leads to the short method.
Method. Multiply each digit of the number by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. Write each answer on its own line. Then add the lines.
- Write the numbers in a column. The number to multiply goes on top. The one-digit number goes underneath, on the right.
52 × 7 14 2 × 7 350 50 × 7 - Multiply the ones. Always start on the right.2 × 7 = 14
- Multiply the tens. The digit 5 is worth 50, so multiply 50 by 7, not just 5.50 is 5 tens. 5 × 7 = 35, so 5 tens × 7 = 35 tens = 350
- Add the lines together. Draw a line and add up the partial products.
52 × 7 14 2 × 7 350 50 × 7 364
14 + 350 = 364 - Write the answer. 52 × 7 = 364
Check. Estimate: 52 is about 50 (to the nearest 10). 50 × 7 = 350. Our answer, 364, is a bit more than 350, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Multiply the whole value of each digit: the 4 in 347 is worth 40, so work out 40 × 6, not 4 × 6.
Key words. The expanded method writes each partial product on its own line, so you can see every step. It leads to the short method.
Method. Multiply each digit of the number by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. Write each answer on its own line. Then add the lines.
- Write the numbers in a column. The number to multiply goes on top. The one-digit number goes underneath, on the right.
48 × 5 40 8 × 5 200 40 × 5 - Multiply the ones. Always start on the right.8 × 5 = 40
- Multiply the tens. The digit 4 is worth 40, so multiply 40 by 5, not just 4.40 is 4 tens. 4 × 5 = 20, so 4 tens × 5 = 20 tens = 200
- Add the lines together. Draw a line and add up the partial products.
48 × 5 40 8 × 5 200 40 × 5 240
40 + 200 = 240 - Write the answer. 48 × 5 = 240
Check. Estimate: 48 is about 50 (to the nearest 10). 50 × 5 = 250. Our answer, 240, is a bit less than 250, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Multiply the whole value of each digit: the 4 in 347 is worth 40, so work out 40 × 6, not 4 × 6.
Key words. The expanded method writes each partial product on its own line, so you can see every step. It leads to the short method.
Method. Multiply each digit of the number by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. Write each answer on its own line. Then add the lines.
- Write the numbers in a column. The number to multiply goes on top. The one-digit number goes underneath, on the right.
75 × 6 30 5 × 6 420 70 × 6 - Multiply the ones. Always start on the right.5 × 6 = 30
- Multiply the tens. The digit 7 is worth 70, so multiply 70 by 6, not just 7.70 is 7 tens. 7 × 6 = 42, so 7 tens × 6 = 42 tens = 420
- Add the lines together. Draw a line and add up the partial products.
75 × 6 30 5 × 6 420 70 × 6 450
30 + 420 = 450 - Write the answer. 75 × 6 = 450
Check. Estimate: 75 is about 80 (to the nearest 10). 80 × 6 = 480. Our answer, 450, is a bit less than 480, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Multiply the whole value of each digit: the 4 in 347 is worth 40, so work out 40 × 6, not 4 × 6.
Key words. The expanded method writes each partial product on its own line, so you can see every step. It leads to the short method.
Method. Multiply each digit of the number by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. Write each answer on its own line. Then add the lines.
- Write the numbers in a column. The number to multiply goes on top. The one-digit number goes underneath, on the right.
123 × 4 12 3 × 4 80 20 × 4 400 100 × 4 - Multiply the ones. Always start on the right.3 × 4 = 12
- Multiply the tens. The digit 2 is worth 20, so multiply 20 by 4, not just 2.20 is 2 tens. 2 × 4 = 8, so 2 tens × 4 = 8 tens = 80
- Multiply the hundreds. The digit 1 is worth 100, so multiply 100 by 4, not just 1.100 is 1 hundred. 1 × 4 = 4, so 1 hundred × 4 = 4 hundreds = 400
- Add the lines together. Draw a line and add up the partial products.
123 × 4 12 3 × 4 80 20 × 4 400 100 × 4 492
12 + 80 = 92
92 + 400 = 492 - Write the answer. 123 × 4 = 492
Check. Estimate: 123 is about 100 (to the nearest 100). 100 × 4 = 400. Our answer, 492, is a bit more than 400, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Multiply the whole value of each digit: the 4 in 347 is worth 40, so work out 40 × 6, not 4 × 6.
Key words. The expanded method writes each partial product on its own line, so you can see every step. It leads to the short method.
Method. Multiply each digit of the number by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. Write each answer on its own line. Then add the lines.
- Write the numbers in a column. The number to multiply goes on top. The one-digit number goes underneath, on the right.
254 × 3 12 4 × 3 150 50 × 3 600 200 × 3 - Multiply the ones. Always start on the right.4 × 3 = 12
- Multiply the tens. The digit 5 is worth 50, so multiply 50 by 3, not just 5.50 is 5 tens. 5 × 3 = 15, so 5 tens × 3 = 15 tens = 150
- Multiply the hundreds. The digit 2 is worth 200, so multiply 200 by 3, not just 2.200 is 2 hundreds. 2 × 3 = 6, so 2 hundreds × 3 = 6 hundreds = 600
- Add the lines together. Draw a line and add up the partial products.
254 × 3 12 4 × 3 150 50 × 3 600 200 × 3 762
12 + 150 = 162
162 + 600 = 762 - Write the answer. 254 × 3 = 762
Check. Estimate: 254 is about 300 (to the nearest 100). 300 × 3 = 900. Our answer, 762, is a bit less than 900, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Multiply the whole value of each digit: the 4 in 347 is worth 40, so work out 40 × 6, not 4 × 6.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
T O 2 1 × 4 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.1 × 4 = 4
4 is less than 10, so write 4 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left.2 × 4 = 8
8 is less than 10, so write 8 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
T O 2 1 × 4 8 4
21 × 4 = 84
Check. Estimate: 21 is about 20 (to the nearest 10). 20 × 4 = 80. Our answer, 84, is a bit more than 80, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Start on the right with the ones. Multiply every digit by the one-digit number.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
T O 3 2 × 3 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.2 × 3 = 6
6 is less than 10, so write 6 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left.3 × 3 = 9
9 is less than 10, so write 9 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
T O 3 2 × 3 9 6
32 × 3 = 96
Check. Estimate: 32 is about 30 (to the nearest 10). 30 × 3 = 90. Our answer, 96, is a bit more than 90, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Start on the right with the ones. Multiply every digit by the one-digit number.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
T O 4 2 × 2 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.2 × 2 = 4
4 is less than 10, so write 4 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left.4 × 2 = 8
8 is less than 10, so write 8 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
T O 4 2 × 2 8 4
42 × 2 = 84
Check. Estimate: 42 is about 40 (to the nearest 10). 40 × 2 = 80. Our answer, 84, is a bit more than 80, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Start on the right with the ones. Multiply every digit by the one-digit number.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
T O 3 3 × 3 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.3 × 3 = 9
9 is less than 10, so write 9 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left.3 × 3 = 9
9 is less than 10, so write 9 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
T O 3 3 × 3 9 9
33 × 3 = 99
Check. Estimate: 33 is about 30 (to the nearest 10). 30 × 3 = 90. Our answer, 99, is a bit more than 90, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Start on the right with the ones. Multiply every digit by the one-digit number.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
T O 2 4 × 2 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.4 × 2 = 8
8 is less than 10, so write 8 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left.2 × 2 = 4
4 is less than 10, so write 4 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
T O 2 4 × 2 4 8
24 × 2 = 48
Check. Estimate: 24 is about 20 (to the nearest 10). 20 × 2 = 40. Our answer, 48, is a bit more than 40, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Start on the right with the ones. Multiply every digit by the one-digit number.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 4 1 × 6 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.1 × 6 = 6
6 is less than 10, so write 6 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left.4 × 6 = 24
24 is 2 hundreds and 4 tens. Write 4 in the tens column and carry 2 to the hundreds column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the hundreds column, but we carried 2 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 2 in the hundreds column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 4 1 × 6 2 4 6 2
41 × 6 = 246
Check. Estimate: 41 is about 40 (to the nearest 10). 40 × 6 = 240. Our answer, 246, is a bit more than 240, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 3 6 × 4 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.6 × 4 = 24
24 is 2 tens and 4 ones. Write 4 in the ones column and carry 2 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 2 we carried.3 × 4 = 12, and 12 + 2 (carried) = 14
14 is 1 hundred and 4 tens. Write 4 in the tens column and carry 1 to the hundreds column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the hundreds column, but we carried 1 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 1 in the hundreds column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 3 6 × 4 1 4 4 1 2
36 × 4 = 144
Check. Estimate: 36 is about 40 (to the nearest 10). 40 × 4 = 160. Our answer, 144, is a bit less than 160, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 4 7 × 3 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.7 × 3 = 21
21 is 2 tens and 1 one. Write 1 in the ones column and carry 2 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 2 we carried.4 × 3 = 12, and 12 + 2 (carried) = 14
14 is 1 hundred and 4 tens. Write 4 in the tens column and carry 1 to the hundreds column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the hundreds column, but we carried 1 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 1 in the hundreds column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 4 7 × 3 1 4 1 1 2
47 × 3 = 141
Check. Estimate: 47 is about 50 (to the nearest 10). 50 × 3 = 150. Our answer, 141, is a bit less than 150, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 5 8 × 6 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.8 × 6 = 48
48 is 4 tens and 8 ones. Write 8 in the ones column and carry 4 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 4 we carried.5 × 6 = 30, and 30 + 4 (carried) = 34
34 is 3 hundreds and 4 tens. Write 4 in the tens column and carry 3 to the hundreds column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the hundreds column, but we carried 3 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 3 in the hundreds column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 5 8 × 6 3 4 8 3 4
58 × 6 = 348
Check. Estimate: 58 is about 60 (to the nearest 10). 60 × 6 = 360. Our answer, 348, is a bit less than 360, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 6 5 × 7 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.5 × 7 = 35
35 is 3 tens and 5 ones. Write 5 in the ones column and carry 3 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 3 we carried.6 × 7 = 42, and 42 + 3 (carried) = 45
45 is 4 hundreds and 5 tens. Write 5 in the tens column and carry 4 to the hundreds column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the hundreds column, but we carried 4 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 4 in the hundreds column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 6 5 × 7 4 5 5 4 3
65 × 7 = 455
Check. Estimate: 65 is about 70 (to the nearest 10). 70 × 7 = 490. Our answer, 455, is a bit less than 490, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 8 3 × 9 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.3 × 9 = 27
27 is 2 tens and 7 ones. Write 7 in the ones column and carry 2 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 2 we carried.8 × 9 = 72, and 72 + 2 (carried) = 74
74 is 7 hundreds and 4 tens. Write 4 in the tens column and carry 7 to the hundreds column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the hundreds column, but we carried 7 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 7 in the hundreds column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 8 3 × 9 7 4 7 7 2
83 × 9 = 747
Check. Estimate: 83 is about 80 (to the nearest 10). 80 × 9 = 720. Our answer, 747, is a bit more than 720, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 9 4 × 8 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.4 × 8 = 32
32 is 3 tens and 2 ones. Write 2 in the ones column and carry 3 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 3 we carried.9 × 8 = 72, and 72 + 3 (carried) = 75
75 is 7 hundreds and 5 tens. Write 5 in the tens column and carry 7 to the hundreds column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the hundreds column, but we carried 7 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 7 in the hundreds column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 9 4 × 8 7 5 2 7 3
94 × 8 = 752
Check. Estimate: 94 is about 90 (to the nearest 10). 90 × 8 = 720. Our answer, 752, is a bit more than 720, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 3 2 1 × 2 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.1 × 2 = 2
2 is less than 10, so write 2 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left.2 × 2 = 4
4 is less than 10, so write 4 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left.3 × 2 = 6
6 is less than 10, so write 6 in the hundreds column. There is nothing to carry. - Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 3 2 1 × 2 6 4 2
321 × 2 = 642
Check. Estimate: 321 is about 300 (to the nearest 100). 300 × 2 = 600. Our answer, 642, is a bit more than 600, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Start on the right with the ones. Multiply every digit by the one-digit number.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 2 1 2 × 4 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.2 × 4 = 8
8 is less than 10, so write 8 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left.1 × 4 = 4
4 is less than 10, so write 4 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left.2 × 4 = 8
8 is less than 10, so write 8 in the hundreds column. There is nothing to carry. - Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 2 1 2 × 4 8 4 8
212 × 4 = 848
Check. Estimate: 212 is about 200 (to the nearest 100). 200 × 4 = 800. Our answer, 848, is a bit more than 800, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Start on the right with the ones. Multiply every digit by the one-digit number.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 1 3 3 × 3 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.3 × 3 = 9
9 is less than 10, so write 9 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left.3 × 3 = 9
9 is less than 10, so write 9 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left.1 × 3 = 3
3 is less than 10, so write 3 in the hundreds column. There is nothing to carry. - Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 1 3 3 × 3 3 9 9
133 × 3 = 399
Check. Estimate: 133 is about 100 (to the nearest 100). 100 × 3 = 300. Our answer, 399, is a bit more than 300, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Start on the right with the ones. Multiply every digit by the one-digit number.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 2 3 1 × 3 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.1 × 3 = 3
3 is less than 10, so write 3 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left.3 × 3 = 9
9 is less than 10, so write 9 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left.2 × 3 = 6
6 is less than 10, so write 6 in the hundreds column. There is nothing to carry. - Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 2 3 1 × 3 6 9 3
231 × 3 = 693
Check. Estimate: 231 is about 200 (to the nearest 100). 200 × 3 = 600. Our answer, 693, is a bit more than 600, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Start on the right with the ones. Multiply every digit by the one-digit number.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 1 1 0 × 5 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.0 × 5 = 0
0 is less than 10, so write 0 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left.1 × 5 = 5
5 is less than 10, so write 5 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left.1 × 5 = 5
5 is less than 10, so write 5 in the hundreds column. There is nothing to carry. - Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 1 1 0 × 5 5 5 0
110 × 5 = 550
Check. Estimate: 110 is about 100 (to the nearest 100). 100 × 5 = 500. Our answer, 550, is a bit more than 500, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Start on the right with the ones. Multiply every digit by the one-digit number.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 1 2 2 × 4 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.2 × 4 = 8
8 is less than 10, so write 8 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left.2 × 4 = 8
8 is less than 10, so write 8 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left.1 × 4 = 4
4 is less than 10, so write 4 in the hundreds column. There is nothing to carry. - Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 1 2 2 × 4 4 8 8
122 × 4 = 488
Check. Estimate: 122 is about 100 (to the nearest 100). 100 × 4 = 400. Our answer, 488, is a bit more than 400, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Start on the right with the ones. Multiply every digit by the one-digit number.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 2 5 6 × 3 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.6 × 3 = 18
18 is 1 ten and 8 ones. Write 8 in the ones column and carry 1 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 1 we carried.5 × 3 = 15, and 15 + 1 (carried) = 16
16 is 1 hundred and 6 tens. Write 6 in the tens column and carry 1 to the hundreds column. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 1 we carried.2 × 3 = 6, and 6 + 1 (carried) = 7
7 is less than 10, so write 7 in the hundreds column. There is nothing to carry. - Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 2 5 6 × 3 7 6 8 1 1
256 × 3 = 768
Check. Estimate: 256 is about 300 (to the nearest 100). 300 × 3 = 900. Our answer, 768, is a bit less than 900, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 3 4 7 × 5 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.7 × 5 = 35
35 is 3 tens and 5 ones. Write 5 in the ones column and carry 3 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 3 we carried.4 × 5 = 20, and 20 + 3 (carried) = 23
23 is 2 hundreds and 3 tens. Write 3 in the tens column and carry 2 to the hundreds column. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 2 we carried.3 × 5 = 15, and 15 + 2 (carried) = 17
17 is 1 thousand and 7 hundreds. Write 7 in the hundreds column and carry 1 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 1 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 1 in the thousands column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
Th H T O 3 4 7 × 5 1 7 3 5 1 2 3
347 × 5 = 1,735
Check. Estimate: 347 is about 300 (to the nearest 100). 300 × 5 = 1,500. Our answer, 1,735, is a bit more than 1,500, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 4 1 8 × 6 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.8 × 6 = 48
48 is 4 tens and 8 ones. Write 8 in the ones column and carry 4 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 4 we carried.1 × 6 = 6, and 6 + 4 (carried) = 10
10 is 1 hundred and 0 tens. Write 0 in the tens column and carry 1 to the hundreds column. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 1 we carried.4 × 6 = 24, and 24 + 1 (carried) = 25
25 is 2 thousands and 5 hundreds. Write 5 in the hundreds column and carry 2 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 2 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 2 in the thousands column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
Th H T O 4 1 8 × 6 2 5 0 8 2 1 4
418 × 6 = 2,508
Check. Estimate: 418 is about 400 (to the nearest 100). 400 × 6 = 2,400. Our answer, 2,508, is a bit more than 2,400, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 5 2 9 × 4 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.9 × 4 = 36
36 is 3 tens and 6 ones. Write 6 in the ones column and carry 3 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 3 we carried.2 × 4 = 8, and 8 + 3 (carried) = 11
11 is 1 hundred and 1 ten. Write 1 in the tens column and carry 1 to the hundreds column. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 1 we carried.5 × 4 = 20, and 20 + 1 (carried) = 21
21 is 2 thousands and 1 hundred. Write 1 in the hundreds column and carry 2 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 2 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 2 in the thousands column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
Th H T O 5 2 9 × 4 2 1 1 6 2 1 3
529 × 4 = 2,116
Check. Estimate: 529 is about 500 (to the nearest 100). 500 × 4 = 2,000. Our answer, 2,116, is a bit more than 2,000, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 6 7 8 × 7 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.8 × 7 = 56
56 is 5 tens and 6 ones. Write 6 in the ones column and carry 5 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 5 we carried.7 × 7 = 49, and 49 + 5 (carried) = 54
54 is 5 hundreds and 4 tens. Write 4 in the tens column and carry 5 to the hundreds column. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 5 we carried.6 × 7 = 42, and 42 + 5 (carried) = 47
47 is 4 thousands and 7 hundreds. Write 7 in the hundreds column and carry 4 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 4 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 4 in the thousands column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
Th H T O 6 7 8 × 7 4 7 4 6 4 5 5
678 × 7 = 4,746
Check. Estimate: 678 is about 700 (to the nearest 100). 700 × 7 = 4,900. Our answer, 4,746, is a bit less than 4,900, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 8 4 5 × 9 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.5 × 9 = 45
45 is 4 tens and 5 ones. Write 5 in the ones column and carry 4 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 4 we carried.4 × 9 = 36, and 36 + 4 (carried) = 40
40 is 4 hundreds and 0 tens. Write 0 in the tens column and carry 4 to the hundreds column. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 4 we carried.8 × 9 = 72, and 72 + 4 (carried) = 76
76 is 7 thousands and 6 hundreds. Write 6 in the hundreds column and carry 7 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 7 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 7 in the thousands column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
Th H T O 8 4 5 × 9 7 6 0 5 7 4 4
845 × 9 = 7,605
Check. Estimate: 845 is about 800 (to the nearest 100). 800 × 9 = 7,200. Our answer, 7,605, is a bit more than 7,200, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 3 0 6 × 4 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.6 × 4 = 24
24 is 2 tens and 4 ones. Write 4 in the ones column and carry 2 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 2 we carried.0 × 4 = 0, and 0 + 2 (carried) = 2
2 is less than 10, so write 2 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left.3 × 4 = 12
12 is 1 thousand and 2 hundreds. Write 2 in the hundreds column and carry 1 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 1 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 1 in the thousands column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
Th H T O 3 0 6 × 4 1 2 2 4 1 2
306 × 4 = 1,224
Check. Estimate: 306 is about 300 (to the nearest 100). 300 × 4 = 1,200. Our answer, 1,224, is a bit more than 1,200, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. A zero digit still needs a step: 0 × the number is 0, but do not forget to add the carried digit.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 4 5 0 × 6 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.0 × 6 = 0
0 is less than 10, so write 0 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left.5 × 6 = 30
30 is 3 hundreds and 0 tens. Write 0 in the tens column and carry 3 to the hundreds column. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 3 we carried.4 × 6 = 24, and 24 + 3 (carried) = 27
27 is 2 thousands and 7 hundreds. Write 7 in the hundreds column and carry 2 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 2 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 2 in the thousands column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
Th H T O 4 5 0 × 6 2 7 0 0 2 3
450 × 6 = 2,700
Check. Estimate: 450 is about 500 (to the nearest 100). 500 × 6 = 3,000. Our answer, 2,700, is a bit less than 3,000, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. A zero digit still needs a step: 0 × the number is 0, but do not forget to add the carried digit.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 7 0 9 × 5 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.9 × 5 = 45
45 is 4 tens and 5 ones. Write 5 in the ones column and carry 4 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 4 we carried.0 × 5 = 0, and 0 + 4 (carried) = 4
4 is less than 10, so write 4 in the tens column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left.7 × 5 = 35
35 is 3 thousands and 5 hundreds. Write 5 in the hundreds column and carry 3 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 3 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 3 in the thousands column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
Th H T O 7 0 9 × 5 3 5 4 5 3 4
709 × 5 = 3,545
Check. Estimate: 709 is about 700 (to the nearest 100). 700 × 5 = 3,500. Our answer, 3,545, is a bit more than 3,500, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. A zero digit still needs a step: 0 × the number is 0, but do not forget to add the carried digit.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 9 2 0 × 7 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.0 × 7 = 0
0 is less than 10, so write 0 in the ones column. There is nothing to carry. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left.2 × 7 = 14
14 is 1 hundred and 4 tens. Write 4 in the tens column and carry 1 to the hundreds column. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 1 we carried.9 × 7 = 63, and 63 + 1 (carried) = 64
64 is 6 thousands and 4 hundreds. Write 4 in the hundreds column and carry 6 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 6 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 6 in the thousands column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
Th H T O 9 2 0 × 7 6 4 4 0 6 1
920 × 7 = 6,440
Check. Estimate: 920 is about 900 (to the nearest 100). 900 × 7 = 6,300. Our answer, 6,440, is a bit more than 6,300, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. A zero digit still needs a step: 0 × the number is 0, but do not forget to add the carried digit.
Key words. To estimate is to find an answer that is close, usually by rounding first. ≈ means “is about equal to”.
Method. Round the big number and multiply to get an estimate. Then work out the exact answer with short multiplication and check that it is close to the estimate.
- Round 48 to the nearest 10. Rounded numbers are easy to multiply.48 ≈ 50 (the ones digit is 8, so round up)
- Work out the estimate. Multiply the rounded number by the one-digit number.50 × 6 = 300
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 4 8 × 6 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.8 × 6 = 48
48 is 4 tens and 8 ones. Write 8 in the ones column and carry 4 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 4 we carried.4 × 6 = 24, and 24 + 4 (carried) = 28
28 is 2 hundreds and 8 tens. Write 8 in the tens column and carry 2 to the hundreds column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the hundreds column, but we carried 2 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 2 in the hundreds column.
- Compare the exact answer with the estimate. They should be close.
H T O 4 8 × 6 2 8 8 2 4
Exact: 288. Estimate: 300. They are close. ✓
Check. Estimate: 48 is about 50 (to the nearest 10). 50 × 6 = 300. Our answer, 288, is a bit less than 300, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. An estimate is not the exact answer. It is a quick way to catch big mistakes.
Key words. To estimate is to find an answer that is close, usually by rounding first. ≈ means “is about equal to”.
Method. Round the big number and multiply to get an estimate. Then work out the exact answer with short multiplication and check that it is close to the estimate.
- Round 287 to the nearest 100. Rounded numbers are easy to multiply.287 ≈ 300 (the tens digit is 8, so round up)
- Work out the estimate. Multiply the rounded number by the one-digit number.300 × 4 = 1,200
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 2 8 7 × 4 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.7 × 4 = 28
28 is 2 tens and 8 ones. Write 8 in the ones column and carry 2 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 2 we carried.8 × 4 = 32, and 32 + 2 (carried) = 34
34 is 3 hundreds and 4 tens. Write 4 in the tens column and carry 3 to the hundreds column. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 3 we carried.2 × 4 = 8, and 8 + 3 (carried) = 11
11 is 1 thousand and 1 hundred. Write 1 in the hundreds column and carry 1 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 1 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 1 in the thousands column.
- Compare the exact answer with the estimate. They should be close.
Th H T O 2 8 7 × 4 1 1 4 8 1 3 2
Exact: 1,148. Estimate: 1,200. They are close. ✓
Check. Estimate: 287 is about 300 (to the nearest 100). 300 × 4 = 1,200. Our answer, 1,148, is a bit less than 1,200, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. An estimate is not the exact answer. It is a quick way to catch big mistakes.
Key words. To estimate is to find an answer that is close, usually by rounding first. ≈ means “is about equal to”.
Method. Round the big number and multiply to get an estimate. Then work out the exact answer with short multiplication and check that it is close to the estimate.
- Round 513 to the nearest 100. Rounded numbers are easy to multiply.513 ≈ 500 (the tens digit is 1, so round down)
- Work out the estimate. Multiply the rounded number by the one-digit number.500 × 8 = 4,000
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 5 1 3 × 8 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.3 × 8 = 24
24 is 2 tens and 4 ones. Write 4 in the ones column and carry 2 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 2 we carried.1 × 8 = 8, and 8 + 2 (carried) = 10
10 is 1 hundred and 0 tens. Write 0 in the tens column and carry 1 to the hundreds column. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 1 we carried.5 × 8 = 40, and 40 + 1 (carried) = 41
41 is 4 thousands and 1 hundred. Write 1 in the hundreds column and carry 4 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 4 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 4 in the thousands column.
- Compare the exact answer with the estimate. They should be close.
Th H T O 5 1 3 × 8 4 1 0 4 4 1 2
Exact: 4,104. Estimate: 4,000. They are close. ✓
Check. Estimate: 513 is about 500 (to the nearest 100). 500 × 8 = 4,000. Our answer, 4,104, is a bit more than 4,000, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. An estimate is not the exact answer. It is a quick way to catch big mistakes.
Method. Do the multiplication again with short multiplication and compare it with Jack’s answer.
- Work out the correct answer. Multiply each column. Add the carried digit in the next column.
H T O 3 6 × 4 1 4 4 1 2
36 × 4 = 144 - Compare with Jack’s answer. Jack wrote 124.144 is not 124, so Jack made a mistake.
- Find the mistake. Jack forgot to add the carried digits.The carry from the ones column should have been added in the tens column.
Check. Estimate: 36 is about 40 (to the nearest 10). 40 × 4 = 160. Our answer, 144, is a bit less than 160, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Write each carried digit small, and add it in the next column after you have multiplied that column.
Method. Do the multiplication again with short multiplication and compare it with Amira’s answer.
- Work out the correct answer. Multiply each column. Add the carried digit in the next column.
Th H T O 3 4 7 × 6 2 0 8 2 2 2 4
347 × 6 = 2,082 - Compare with Amira’s answer. Amira wrote 1,842.2,082 is not 1,842, so Amira made a mistake.
- Find the mistake. Amira forgot to add the carried digits.The carry from the ones column should have been added in the tens column.
Check. Estimate: 347 is about 300 (to the nearest 100). 300 × 6 = 1,800. Our answer, 2,082, is a bit more than 1,800, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Write each carried digit small, and add it in the next column after you have multiplied that column.
Method. Do the multiplication again with short multiplication and compare it with Noah’s answer.
- Work out the correct answer. Multiply each column. Add the carried digit in the next column.
Th H T O 5 2 8 × 3 1 5 8 4 1 2
528 × 3 = 1,584 - Compare with Noah’s answer. Noah wrote 1,564.1,584 is not 1,564, so Noah made a mistake.
- Find the mistake. Noah forgot to add the carried digits.The carry from the ones column should have been added in the tens column.
Check. Estimate: 528 is about 500 (to the nearest 100). 500 × 3 = 1,500. Our answer, 1,584, is a bit more than 1,500, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Write each carried digit small, and add it in the next column after you have multiplied that column.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows what we know and what we need to find out.
- Multiply the number of chairs in a row by the number of rows. There are 8 rows with 125 chairs in each row.125 × 8 = 1,000
Th H T O 1 2 5 × 8 1 0 0 0 1 2 4 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.1,000 chairs
Check. Estimate: 100 × 8 = 800 and 25 × 8 = 200, so 800 + 200 = 1,000. ✓
Watch out. Take care with the carries: 5 × 8 = 40 means write 0, carry 4.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows what we know and what we need to find out.
- Multiply the pencils in one box by the number of boxes. 6 boxes with 245 pencils in each.245 × 6 = 1,470
Th H T O 2 4 5 × 6 1 4 7 0 1 2 3 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.1,470 pencils
Check. Estimate: 245 is about 200 (to the nearest 100). 200 × 6 = 1,200. Our answer, 1,470, is a bit more than 1,200, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Write the carried digits small and add them in the next column.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows what we know and what we need to find out.
- Multiply the seats in one carriage by the number of carriages. 7 carriages with 76 seats in each.76 × 7 = 532
H T O 7 6 × 7 5 3 2 5 4 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.532 seats
Check. Estimate: 76 is about 80 (to the nearest 10). 80 × 7 = 560. Our answer, 532, is a bit less than 560, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. 7 × 6 = 42: write 2 and carry 4. Then 7 × 7 = 49, and 49 + 4 = 53.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows what we know and what we need to find out.
- Multiply the cost of one bike by the number sold. Each bike costs £189 and 5 bikes are sold.£189 × 5 = £945
H T O 1 8 9 × 5 9 4 5 4 4 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.£945
Check. Estimate: 189 is about 200 (to the nearest 100). 200 × 5 = 1,000. Our answer, 945, is a bit less than 1,000, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the £ sign in your answer.
Method. Check Mei’s answer with an estimate, then do the multiplication properly.
- Estimate. 406 is about 400. 4 × 5 = 20, so 400 × 5 = 2,000.400 × 5 = 2,000
- Compare. The answer should be close to 2,000. 230 is much too small.Mei’s answer is not sensible.
- Work out the correct answer. Use short multiplication. The 0 in the tens place gives 0 × 5 = 0, plus the carry.
Th H T O 4 0 6 × 5 2 0 3 0 2 3
406 × 5 = 2,030
Check. 406 × 5: 400 × 5 + 6 × 5 = 2,000 + 30 = 2,030 ✓
Watch out. A zero is still a column. Write it down, so the digits stay in the right places.
Method. Try some three-digit numbers multiplied by 3. Look for one answer with three digits and one with four digits.
- Try a small number. Use the grid or short multiplication.100 × 3 = 300 (3 digits)
- Try a bigger number. 400 × 3 = 1,200 (4 digits)
- Find the turning point. 333 × 3 = 999 has 3 digits, but 334 × 3 = 1,002 has 4 digits.333 × 3 = 999 334 × 3 = 1,002
- Decide. One works and one does not.Sometimes
Check. 1,000 ÷ 3 is between 333 and 334. ✓
Watch out. “Sometimes” needs an example that works and an example that does not.
Method. Work out each multiplication. Then find the two with the same answer, 504.
- Work out each one. Partition the two- or three-digit number.A: 168 × 3: 100 × 3 + 60 × 3 + 8 × 3 = 300 + 180 + 24 = 504
B: 71 × 7: 70 × 7 + 1 × 7 = 490 + 7 = 497
C: 84 × 6: 80 × 6 + 4 × 6 = 480 + 24 = 504
D: 99 × 5: 90 × 5 + 9 × 5 = 450 + 45 = 495 - Choose the two that match. Look for answers that are the same.A and C (both are 504)
Check. 3 × 168 = 504 and 6 × 84 = 504. 6 is double 3 and 84 is half of 168. ✓
Watch out. Multiplying one number by 2 and halving the other keeps the answer the same.
Method. The answer must be less than 1,000. Find the number where 4 times it just reaches 1,000, then go one below it.
- Find when the answer reaches 1,000. 250 × 4 = 1,000, because 25 × 4 = 100.250 × 4 = 1,000. This has 4 digits, so 250 is too big.
- Try the number just below. 249 is one less than 250, so the answer is 4 less than 1,000.
H T O 2 4 9 × 4 9 9 6 1 3
249 × 4 = 996 - Check it is the biggest. 996 has 3 digits. 250 gives 1,000, which has 4 digits.The biggest number is 249.
Check. 1,000 − 4 = 996. ✓
Watch out. Think about where the answer just reaches 1,000. The number just before it is the biggest that works.
Dividing with place value and short division
Printable: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · Open this lesson on its own page
Dividing means sharing equally, or making equal groups. You already know many division facts from your times tables. For bigger numbers, use place value and known facts.
Try 84 ÷ 4. Partition 84 into 80 + 4. 80 ÷ 4 = 20 (because 8 ÷ 4 = 2, so 8 tens ÷ 4 = 2 tens). 4 ÷ 4 = 1. Add the answers: 20 + 1 = 21. Or use a known fact with zeros: 24 ÷ 6 = 4, so 2,400 ÷ 6 = 400 (24 hundreds ÷ 6 = 4 hundreds).
Sometimes the tens do not share out exactly. For 52 ÷ 4, split 52 into chunks that you can divide: 52 = 40 + 12. 40 ÷ 4 = 10 and 12 ÷ 4 = 3. So 52 ÷ 4 = 10 + 3 = 13.
Why does that work? Share 52 (5 tens and 2 ones) between 4. Each share gets 1 ten, and 1 ten is left over. You cannot share 1 ten between 4, so exchange it for 10 ones. Now there are 10 + 2 = 12 ones. Each share gets 3 ones. Each share has 1 ten and 3 ones, which is 13.
The bus stop method (short division) writes this down neatly. Put the number you divide inside the bus stop and the number you divide by outside. Work from the left. For 52 ÷ 4: 5 ÷ 4 = 1 remainder 1. Write 1 above the 5. Carry the remainder 1 to the next digit: it makes 12. 12 ÷ 4 = 3. Write 3 above the 2.
| 1 | 3 | |
| 4 | 5 | 12 |
The answer is 13.
Three-digit numbers work the same way, one digit at a time. For 756 ÷ 6: 7 ÷ 6 = 1 remainder 1, carry 1. 15 ÷ 6 = 2 remainder 3, carry 3. 36 ÷ 6 = 6. The answer is 126.
| 1 | 2 | 6 | |
| 6 | 7 | 15 | 36 |
If the first digit is too small, write 0 above it and carry it. For 285 ÷ 5: 2 ÷ 5 = 0 remainder 2, carry 2. 28 ÷ 5 = 5 remainder 3, carry 3. 35 ÷ 5 = 7. The answer is 57 (we do not write the 0 at the front).
| 0 | 5 | 7 | |
| 5 | 2 | 28 | 35 |
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. A chunk is a part of the number that is easy to divide. To carry is to pass the leftover to the next digit.
Key ideas
- Use place value: 84 ÷ 4 = 80 ÷ 4 + 4 ÷ 4 = 20 + 1.
- Use known facts: 24 ÷ 6 = 4, so 2,400 ÷ 6 = 400.
- Bus stop: start on the LEFT. Divide the first digit. Carry any remainder to the next digit as extra tens, ones...
- If a digit is too small to divide, write 0 above it and carry it.
- Check by multiplying back: 13 × 4 = 52.
- Answers have a zero when a step has nothing to share: 618 ÷ 6 = 103.
Key words. A known fact is a fact you can already recall. A derived fact is a new fact you work out from a known fact.
Method. Use the fact you know, 36 ÷ 9 = 4, and place value. 3,600 is 36 hundreds, so the answer is 4 hundreds.
- Spot the fact you know. Take away the zeros and look at the digits that are left.36 ÷ 9 = 4
- Say the big number in hundreds. 3,600 is 36 hundreds.3,600 = 36 hundreds
- Divide, using the known fact. 36 hundreds ÷ 9 = 4 hundreds, because 36 ÷ 9 = 4.36 ÷ 9 = 4, so 36 hundreds ÷ 9 = 4 hundreds
- Change 4 hundreds back to a number. Put the zeros back.4 hundreds = 400
- Write the answer. 3,600 ÷ 9 = 400
Check. Multiply back: 400 × 9 = 3,600. ✓
Watch out. Keep the zeros. 420 ÷ 7 is 60, not 6.
Key words. To divide using place value is to split the number into parts that you can divide using times table facts, then add the answers. A remainder is what is left over.
Method. Split 84 into chunks that you can divide by 4 using times table facts. Divide each chunk, then add the answers.
- Split the number into chunks that are easy to divide. Use multiples of 4 like 40, 80, 120... and the 4 times table. Take the biggest chunk first.84 = 80 + 4
- Divide each chunk. Use a times table fact and place value.80 ÷ 4 = 20 (because 20 × 4 = 80)
4 ÷ 4 = 1 (because 1 × 4 = 4) - Add the answers. Add up the chunk answers.20 + 1 = 21
- Write the answer. 84 ÷ 4 = 21
Check. Multiply back: 21 × 4 = 20 × 4 + 1 × 4 = 80 + 4 = 84. ✓
Watch out. Make sure the chunks add back to 84: 80 + 4 = 84.
Key words. To divide using place value is to split the number into parts that you can divide using times table facts, then add the answers. A remainder is what is left over.
Method. Split 78 into chunks that you can divide by 6 using times table facts. Divide each chunk, then add the answers.
- Split the number into chunks that are easy to divide. Use multiples of 6 like 60, 120, 180... and the 6 times table. Take the biggest chunk first.78 = 60 + 18
- Divide each chunk. Use a times table fact and place value.60 ÷ 6 = 10 (because 10 × 6 = 60)
18 ÷ 6 = 3 (because 3 × 6 = 18) - Add the answers. Add up the chunk answers.10 + 3 = 13
- Write the answer. 78 ÷ 6 = 13
Check. Multiply back: 13 × 6 = 10 × 6 + 3 × 6 = 60 + 18 = 78. ✓
Watch out. Make sure the chunks add back to 78: 60 + 18 = 78.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 5 2 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 4 = 1, remainder 1
Write 1 above the 5.
Exchange the remainder: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit.1 4 5 12 - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 2 ones there are 10 + 2 = 12 ones.
12 ÷ 4: 3 × 4 = 12. Write 3 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder.1 3 4 5 12 - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 3 4 5 12
52 ÷ 4 = 13
Check. Multiply back: 13 × 4 = 10 × 4 + 3 × 4 = 40 + 12 = 52. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 9 6 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 3 = 3
Write 3 above the 9. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 6 ones.
6 ÷ 3: 2 × 3 = 6. Write 2 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
3 2 3 9 6
96 ÷ 3 = 32
Check. Multiply back: 32 × 3 = 30 × 3 + 2 × 3 = 90 + 6 = 96. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 7 5 6 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 6 = 1, remainder 1
Write 1 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 1 hundred becomes 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit.1 6 7 15 6 - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 5 tens there are 10 + 5 = 15 tens.
15 ÷ 6: 2 × 6 = 12, and 15 − 12 = 3. Write 2 above the 5.
Carry the remainder 3 to the next digit.1 2 6 7 15 36 - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 6 ones there are 30 + 6 = 36 ones.
36 ÷ 6: 6 × 6 = 36. Write 6 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder.1 2 6 6 7 15 36 - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 2 6 6 7 15 36
756 ÷ 6 = 126
Check. Multiply back: 126 × 6 = 100 × 6 + 20 × 6 + 6 × 6 = 600 + 120 + 36 = 756. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 2 8 5 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 5: 2 is smaller than 5, so we cannot make a whole hundred for each share. Write 0 (this leading 0 is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 hundreds for 20 tens and carry them to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 8 tens there are 20 + 8 = 28 tens.
28 ÷ 5: 5 × 5 = 25, and 28 − 25 = 3. Write 5 above the 8.
Carry the remainder 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 5 ones there are 30 + 5 = 35 ones.
35 ÷ 5: 7 × 5 = 35. Write 7 above the 5.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 5 7 5 2 28 35
285 ÷ 5 = 57
Check. Multiply back: 57 × 5 = 50 × 5 + 7 × 5 = 250 + 35 = 285. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 5, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 6 1 8 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 6 = 1
Write 1 above the 6. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 1 tens.
1 ÷ 6: 1 is smaller than 6, so write 0.
Carry the remainder 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 8 ones there are 10 + 8 = 18 ones.
18 ÷ 6: 3 × 6 = 18. Write 3 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 0 3 6 6 1 18
618 ÷ 6 = 103
Check. Multiply back: 103 × 6 = 100 × 6 + 3 × 6 = 600 + 18 = 618. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Watch out
Start on the left (the opposite of addition and multiplication!). And do not lose the remainder: carry it to the next digit. When a step has nothing to share (like 1 ÷ 6) you must still write 0 in the answer, or the digits slip into the wrong places: 618 ÷ 6 = 103, not 13.Exercise 4D Dividing with place value and short division
Non-calculatorKey words. A known fact is a fact you can already recall. A derived fact is a new fact you work out from a known fact.
Method. Use the fact you know, 42 ÷ 7 = 6, and place value. 420 is 42 tens, so the answer is 6 tens.
- Spot the fact you know. Take away the zeros and look at the digits that are left.42 ÷ 7 = 6
- Say the big number in tens. 420 is 42 tens.420 = 42 tens
- Divide, using the known fact. 42 tens ÷ 7 = 6 tens, because 42 ÷ 7 = 6.42 ÷ 7 = 6, so 42 tens ÷ 7 = 6 tens
- Change 6 tens back to a number. Put the zeros back.6 tens = 60
- Write the answer. 420 ÷ 7 = 60
Check. Multiply back: 60 × 7 = 420. ✓
Watch out. Keep the zeros. 420 ÷ 7 is 60, not 6.
Key words. A known fact is a fact you can already recall. A derived fact is a new fact you work out from a known fact.
Method. Use the fact you know, 24 ÷ 6 = 4, and place value. 2,400 is 24 hundreds, so the answer is 4 hundreds.
- Spot the fact you know. Take away the zeros and look at the digits that are left.24 ÷ 6 = 4
- Say the big number in hundreds. 2,400 is 24 hundreds.2,400 = 24 hundreds
- Divide, using the known fact. 24 hundreds ÷ 6 = 4 hundreds, because 24 ÷ 6 = 4.24 ÷ 6 = 4, so 24 hundreds ÷ 6 = 4 hundreds
- Change 4 hundreds back to a number. Put the zeros back.4 hundreds = 400
- Write the answer. 2,400 ÷ 6 = 400
Check. Multiply back: 400 × 6 = 2,400. ✓
Watch out. Keep the zeros. 420 ÷ 7 is 60, not 6.
Key words. A known fact is a fact you can already recall. A derived fact is a new fact you work out from a known fact.
Method. Use the fact you know, 32 ÷ 4 = 8, and place value. 320 is 32 tens, so the answer is 8 tens.
- Spot the fact you know. Take away the zeros and look at the digits that are left.32 ÷ 4 = 8
- Say the big number in tens. 320 is 32 tens.320 = 32 tens
- Divide, using the known fact. 32 tens ÷ 4 = 8 tens, because 32 ÷ 4 = 8.32 ÷ 4 = 8, so 32 tens ÷ 4 = 8 tens
- Change 8 tens back to a number. Put the zeros back.8 tens = 80
- Write the answer. 320 ÷ 4 = 80
Check. Multiply back: 80 × 4 = 320. ✓
Watch out. Keep the zeros. 420 ÷ 7 is 60, not 6.
Key words. A known fact is a fact you can already recall. A derived fact is a new fact you work out from a known fact.
Method. Use the fact you know, 72 ÷ 8 = 9, and place value. 7,200 is 72 hundreds, so the answer is 9 hundreds.
- Spot the fact you know. Take away the zeros and look at the digits that are left.72 ÷ 8 = 9
- Say the big number in hundreds. 7,200 is 72 hundreds.7,200 = 72 hundreds
- Divide, using the known fact. 72 hundreds ÷ 8 = 9 hundreds, because 72 ÷ 8 = 9.72 ÷ 8 = 9, so 72 hundreds ÷ 8 = 9 hundreds
- Change 9 hundreds back to a number. Put the zeros back.9 hundreds = 900
- Write the answer. 7,200 ÷ 8 = 900
Check. Multiply back: 900 × 8 = 7,200. ✓
Watch out. Keep the zeros. 420 ÷ 7 is 60, not 6.
Key words. A known fact is a fact you can already recall. A derived fact is a new fact you work out from a known fact.
Method. Use the fact you know, 35 ÷ 5 = 7, and place value. 350 is 35 tens, so the answer is 7 tens.
- Spot the fact you know. Take away the zeros and look at the digits that are left.35 ÷ 5 = 7
- Say the big number in tens. 350 is 35 tens.350 = 35 tens
- Divide, using the known fact. 35 tens ÷ 5 = 7 tens, because 35 ÷ 5 = 7.35 ÷ 5 = 7, so 35 tens ÷ 5 = 7 tens
- Change 7 tens back to a number. Put the zeros back.7 tens = 70
- Write the answer. 350 ÷ 5 = 70
Check. Multiply back: 70 × 5 = 350. ✓
Watch out. Keep the zeros. 420 ÷ 7 is 60, not 6.
Key words. A known fact is a fact you can already recall. A derived fact is a new fact you work out from a known fact.
Method. Use the fact you know, 54 ÷ 9 = 6, and place value. 5,400 is 54 hundreds, so the answer is 6 hundreds.
- Spot the fact you know. Take away the zeros and look at the digits that are left.54 ÷ 9 = 6
- Say the big number in hundreds. 5,400 is 54 hundreds.5,400 = 54 hundreds
- Divide, using the known fact. 54 hundreds ÷ 9 = 6 hundreds, because 54 ÷ 9 = 6.54 ÷ 9 = 6, so 54 hundreds ÷ 9 = 6 hundreds
- Change 6 hundreds back to a number. Put the zeros back.6 hundreds = 600
- Write the answer. 5,400 ÷ 9 = 600
Check. Multiply back: 600 × 9 = 5,400. ✓
Watch out. Keep the zeros. 420 ÷ 7 is 60, not 6.
Key words. To divide using place value is to split the number into parts that you can divide using times table facts, then add the answers. A remainder is what is left over.
Method. Split 68 into chunks that you can divide by 4 using times table facts. Divide each chunk, then add the answers.
- Split the number into chunks that are easy to divide. Use multiples of 4 like 40, 80, 120... and the 4 times table. Take the biggest chunk first.68 = 40 + 28
- Divide each chunk. Use a times table fact and place value.40 ÷ 4 = 10 (because 10 × 4 = 40)
28 ÷ 4 = 7 (because 7 × 4 = 28) - Add the answers. Add up the chunk answers.10 + 7 = 17
- Write the answer. 68 ÷ 4 = 17
Check. Multiply back: 17 × 4 = 10 × 4 + 7 × 4 = 40 + 28 = 68. ✓
Watch out. Make sure the chunks add back to 68: 40 + 28 = 68.
Key words. To divide using place value is to split the number into parts that you can divide using times table facts, then add the answers. A remainder is what is left over.
Method. Split 72 into chunks that you can divide by 3 using times table facts. Divide each chunk, then add the answers.
- Split the number into chunks that are easy to divide. Use multiples of 3 like 30, 60, 90... and the 3 times table. Take the biggest chunk first.72 = 60 + 12
- Divide each chunk. Use a times table fact and place value.60 ÷ 3 = 20 (because 20 × 3 = 60)
12 ÷ 3 = 4 (because 4 × 3 = 12) - Add the answers. Add up the chunk answers.20 + 4 = 24
- Write the answer. 72 ÷ 3 = 24
Check. Multiply back: 24 × 3 = 20 × 3 + 4 × 3 = 60 + 12 = 72. ✓
Watch out. Make sure the chunks add back to 72: 60 + 12 = 72.
Key words. To divide using place value is to split the number into parts that you can divide using times table facts, then add the answers. A remainder is what is left over.
Method. Split 95 into chunks that you can divide by 5 using times table facts. Divide each chunk, then add the answers.
- Split the number into chunks that are easy to divide. Use multiples of 5 like 50, 100, 150... and the 5 times table. Take the biggest chunk first.95 = 50 + 45
- Divide each chunk. Use a times table fact and place value.50 ÷ 5 = 10 (because 10 × 5 = 50)
45 ÷ 5 = 9 (because 9 × 5 = 45) - Add the answers. Add up the chunk answers.10 + 9 = 19
- Write the answer. 95 ÷ 5 = 19
Check. Multiply back: 19 × 5 = 10 × 5 + 9 × 5 = 50 + 45 = 95. ✓
Watch out. Make sure the chunks add back to 95: 50 + 45 = 95.
Key words. To divide using place value is to split the number into parts that you can divide using times table facts, then add the answers. A remainder is what is left over.
Method. Split 84 into chunks that you can divide by 6 using times table facts. Divide each chunk, then add the answers.
- Split the number into chunks that are easy to divide. Use multiples of 6 like 60, 120, 180... and the 6 times table. Take the biggest chunk first.84 = 60 + 24
- Divide each chunk. Use a times table fact and place value.60 ÷ 6 = 10 (because 10 × 6 = 60)
24 ÷ 6 = 4 (because 4 × 6 = 24) - Add the answers. Add up the chunk answers.10 + 4 = 14
- Write the answer. 84 ÷ 6 = 14
Check. Multiply back: 14 × 6 = 10 × 6 + 4 × 6 = 60 + 24 = 84. ✓
Watch out. Make sure the chunks add back to 84: 60 + 24 = 84.
Key words. To divide using place value is to split the number into parts that you can divide using times table facts, then add the answers. A remainder is what is left over.
Method. Split 96 into chunks that you can divide by 8 using times table facts. Divide each chunk, then add the answers.
- Split the number into chunks that are easy to divide. Use multiples of 8 like 80, 160, 240... and the 8 times table. Take the biggest chunk first.96 = 80 + 16
- Divide each chunk. Use a times table fact and place value.80 ÷ 8 = 10 (because 10 × 8 = 80)
16 ÷ 8 = 2 (because 2 × 8 = 16) - Add the answers. Add up the chunk answers.10 + 2 = 12
- Write the answer. 96 ÷ 8 = 12
Check. Multiply back: 12 × 8 = 10 × 8 + 2 × 8 = 80 + 16 = 96. ✓
Watch out. Make sure the chunks add back to 96: 80 + 16 = 96.
Key words. To divide using place value is to split the number into parts that you can divide using times table facts, then add the answers. A remainder is what is left over.
Method. Split 78 into chunks that you can divide by 3 using times table facts. Divide each chunk, then add the answers.
- Split the number into chunks that are easy to divide. Use multiples of 3 like 30, 60, 90... and the 3 times table. Take the biggest chunk first.78 = 60 + 18
- Divide each chunk. Use a times table fact and place value.60 ÷ 3 = 20 (because 20 × 3 = 60)
18 ÷ 3 = 6 (because 6 × 3 = 18) - Add the answers. Add up the chunk answers.20 + 6 = 26
- Write the answer. 78 ÷ 3 = 26
Check. Multiply back: 26 × 3 = 20 × 3 + 6 × 3 = 60 + 18 = 78. ✓
Watch out. Make sure the chunks add back to 78: 60 + 18 = 78.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
2 8 4 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 2 = 4
Write 4 above the 8. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 4 ones.
4 ÷ 2: 2 × 2 = 4. Write 2 above the 4.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
4 2 2 8 4
84 ÷ 2 = 42
Check. Multiply back: 42 × 2 = 40 × 2 + 2 × 2 = 80 + 4 = 84. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 6 9 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 3 = 2
Write 2 above the 6. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 9 ones.
9 ÷ 3: 3 × 3 = 9. Write 3 above the 9.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 3 3 6 9
69 ÷ 3 = 23
Check. Multiply back: 23 × 3 = 20 × 3 + 3 × 3 = 60 + 9 = 69. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 4 8 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 4 = 1
Write 1 above the 4. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 8 ones.
8 ÷ 4: 2 × 4 = 8. Write 2 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 2 4 4 8
48 ÷ 4 = 12
Check. Multiply back: 12 × 4 = 10 × 4 + 2 × 4 = 40 + 8 = 48. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 6 6 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 6 = 1
Write 1 above the 6. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 6 ones.
6 ÷ 6: 1 × 6 = 6. Write 1 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 1 6 6 6
66 ÷ 6 = 11
Check. Multiply back: 11 × 6 = 10 × 6 + 1 × 6 = 60 + 6 = 66. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 9 3 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 3 = 3
Write 3 above the 9. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 3 ones.
3 ÷ 3: 1 × 3 = 3. Write 1 above the 3.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
3 1 3 9 3
93 ÷ 3 = 31
Check. Multiply back: 31 × 3 = 30 × 3 + 1 × 3 = 90 + 3 = 93. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
2 8 6 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 2 = 4
Write 4 above the 8. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 6 ones.
6 ÷ 2: 3 × 2 = 6. Write 3 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
4 3 2 8 6
86 ÷ 2 = 43
Check. Multiply back: 43 × 2 = 40 × 2 + 3 × 2 = 80 + 6 = 86. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 5 2 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 4 = 1, remainder 1
Write 1 above the 5.
Exchange the remainder: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 2 ones there are 10 + 2 = 12 ones.
12 ÷ 4: 3 × 4 = 12. Write 3 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 3 4 5 12
52 ÷ 4 = 13
Check. Multiply back: 13 × 4 = 10 × 4 + 3 × 4 = 40 + 12 = 52. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 9 1 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 7 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 1 ones there are 20 + 1 = 21 ones.
21 ÷ 7: 3 × 7 = 21. Write 3 above the 1.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 3 7 9 21
91 ÷ 7 = 13
Check. Multiply back: 13 × 7 = 10 × 7 + 3 × 7 = 70 + 21 = 91. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 7 5 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 5 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 5 ones there are 20 + 5 = 25 ones.
25 ÷ 5: 5 × 5 = 25. Write 5 above the 5.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 5 5 7 25
75 ÷ 5 = 15
Check. Multiply back: 15 × 5 = 10 × 5 + 5 × 5 = 50 + 25 = 75. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 9 6 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 6 = 1, remainder 3
Write 1 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 6 ones there are 30 + 6 = 36 ones.
36 ÷ 6: 6 × 6 = 36. Write 6 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 6 6 9 36
96 ÷ 6 = 16
Check. Multiply back: 16 × 6 = 10 × 6 + 6 × 6 = 60 + 36 = 96. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 8 1 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 3 = 2, remainder 2
Write 2 above the 8.
Exchange the remainder: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 1 ones there are 20 + 1 = 21 ones.
21 ÷ 3: 7 × 3 = 21. Write 7 above the 1.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 7 3 8 21
81 ÷ 3 = 27
Check. Multiply back: 27 × 3 = 20 × 3 + 7 × 3 = 60 + 21 = 81. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 7 2 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 4 = 1, remainder 3
Write 1 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 3 tens become 30 ones. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 2 ones there are 30 + 2 = 32 ones.
32 ÷ 4: 8 × 4 = 32. Write 8 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 8 4 7 32
72 ÷ 4 = 18
Check. Multiply back: 18 × 4 = 10 × 4 + 8 × 4 = 40 + 32 = 72. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
2 6 4 2 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 2 = 3
Write 3 above the 6. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 4 tens.
4 ÷ 2: 2 × 2 = 4. Write 2 above the 4. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 2 ones.
2 ÷ 2: 1 × 2 = 2. Write 1 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
3 2 1 2 6 4 2
642 ÷ 2 = 321
Check. Multiply back: 321 × 2 = 300 × 2 + 20 × 2 + 1 × 2 = 600 + 40 + 2 = 642. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 9 3 6 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 3 = 3
Write 3 above the 9. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 3 tens.
3 ÷ 3: 1 × 3 = 3. Write 1 above the 3. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 6 ones.
6 ÷ 3: 2 × 3 = 6. Write 2 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
3 1 2 3 9 3 6
936 ÷ 3 = 312
Check. Multiply back: 312 × 3 = 300 × 3 + 10 × 3 + 2 × 3 = 900 + 30 + 6 = 936. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 8 4 8 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 4 = 2
Write 2 above the 8. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 4 tens.
4 ÷ 4: 1 × 4 = 4. Write 1 above the 4. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 8 ones.
8 ÷ 4: 2 × 4 = 8. Write 2 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 1 2 4 8 4 8
848 ÷ 4 = 212
Check. Multiply back: 212 × 4 = 200 × 4 + 10 × 4 + 2 × 4 = 800 + 40 + 8 = 848. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 3 9 6 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 3 = 1
Write 1 above the 3. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 9 tens.
9 ÷ 3: 3 × 3 = 9. Write 3 above the 9. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 6 ones.
6 ÷ 3: 2 × 3 = 6. Write 2 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 3 2 3 3 9 6
396 ÷ 3 = 132
Check. Multiply back: 132 × 3 = 100 × 3 + 30 × 3 + 2 × 3 = 300 + 90 + 6 = 396. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 7 5 6 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 6 = 1, remainder 1
Write 1 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 1 hundred becomes 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 5 tens there are 10 + 5 = 15 tens.
15 ÷ 6: 2 × 6 = 12, and 15 − 12 = 3. Write 2 above the 5.
Carry the remainder 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 6 ones there are 30 + 6 = 36 ones.
36 ÷ 6: 6 × 6 = 36. Write 6 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 2 6 6 7 15 36
756 ÷ 6 = 126
Check. Multiply back: 126 × 6 = 100 × 6 + 20 × 6 + 6 × 6 = 600 + 120 + 36 = 756. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 4 3 2 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 3 = 1, remainder 1
Write 1 above the 4.
Exchange the remainder: 1 hundred becomes 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 3 tens there are 10 + 3 = 13 tens.
13 ÷ 3: 4 × 3 = 12, and 13 − 12 = 1. Write 4 above the 3.
Carry the remainder 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 2 ones there are 10 + 2 = 12 ones.
12 ÷ 3: 4 × 3 = 12. Write 4 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 4 4 3 4 13 12
432 ÷ 3 = 144
Check. Multiply back: 144 × 3 = 100 × 3 + 40 × 3 + 4 × 3 = 300 + 120 + 12 = 432. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 6 7 2 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 4 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 6.
Exchange the remainder: 2 hundreds become 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 7 tens there are 20 + 7 = 27 tens.
27 ÷ 4: 6 × 4 = 24, and 27 − 24 = 3. Write 6 above the 7.
Carry the remainder 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 2 ones there are 30 + 2 = 32 ones.
32 ÷ 4: 8 × 4 = 32. Write 8 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 6 8 4 6 27 32
672 ÷ 4 = 168
Check. Multiply back: 168 × 4 = 100 × 4 + 60 × 4 + 8 × 4 = 400 + 240 + 32 = 672. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 5 8 5 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 5 = 1
Write 1 above the 5. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 8 tens.
8 ÷ 5: 1 × 5 = 5, and 8 − 5 = 3. Write 1 above the 8.
Carry the remainder 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 5 ones there are 30 + 5 = 35 ones.
35 ÷ 5: 7 × 5 = 35. Write 7 above the 5.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 1 7 5 5 8 35
585 ÷ 5 = 117
Check. Multiply back: 117 × 5 = 100 × 5 + 10 × 5 + 7 × 5 = 500 + 50 + 35 = 585. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 8 4 6 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 9: 8 is smaller than 9, so we cannot make a whole hundred for each share. Write 0 (this leading 0 is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 8 hundreds for 80 tens and carry them to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 8 that was carried.The carried 8 makes 80 tens. With the 4 tens there are 80 + 4 = 84 tens.
84 ÷ 9: 9 × 9 = 81, and 84 − 81 = 3. Write 9 above the 4.
Carry the remainder 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 6 ones there are 30 + 6 = 36 ones.
36 ÷ 9: 4 × 9 = 36. Write 4 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 9 4 9 8 84 36
846 ÷ 9 = 94
Check. Multiply back: 94 × 9 = 90 × 9 + 4 × 9 = 810 + 36 = 846. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 9, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 9 1 2 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 8 = 1, remainder 1
Write 1 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 1 hundred becomes 10 tens. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 1 tens there are 10 + 1 = 11 tens.
11 ÷ 8: 1 × 8 = 8, and 11 − 8 = 3. Write 1 above the 1.
Carry the remainder 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 2 ones there are 30 + 2 = 32 ones.
32 ÷ 8: 4 × 8 = 32. Write 4 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 1 4 8 9 11 32
912 ÷ 8 = 114
Check. Multiply back: 114 × 8 = 100 × 8 + 10 × 8 + 4 × 8 = 800 + 80 + 32 = 912. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 6 1 8 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 6 = 1
Write 1 above the 6. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 1 tens.
1 ÷ 6: 1 is smaller than 6, so write 0.
Carry the remainder 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 8 ones there are 10 + 8 = 18 ones.
18 ÷ 6: 3 × 6 = 18. Write 3 above the 8.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 0 3 6 6 1 18
618 ÷ 6 = 103
Check. Multiply back: 103 × 6 = 100 × 6 + 3 × 6 = 600 + 18 = 618. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 8 1 2 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 4 = 2
Write 2 above the 8. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 1 tens.
1 ÷ 4: 1 is smaller than 4, so write 0.
Carry the remainder 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 2 ones there are 10 + 2 = 12 ones.
12 ÷ 4: 3 × 4 = 12. Write 3 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 0 3 4 8 1 12
812 ÷ 4 = 203
Check. Multiply back: 203 × 4 = 200 × 4 + 3 × 4 = 800 + 12 = 812. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 5 4 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 9: 5 is smaller than 9, so we cannot make a whole hundred for each share. Write 0 (this leading 0 is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 hundreds for 50 tens and carry them to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 tens. With the 4 tens there are 50 + 4 = 54 tens.
54 ÷ 9: 6 × 9 = 54. Write 6 above the 4. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 0 ones.
0 ÷ 9: 0 is smaller than 9, so write 0.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 6 0 9 5 54 0
540 ÷ 9 = 60
Check. Multiply back: 60 × 9 = 540. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 9, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 7 1 4 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 7 = 1
Write 1 above the 7. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 1 tens.
1 ÷ 7: 1 is smaller than 7, so write 0.
Carry the remainder 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 4 ones there are 10 + 4 = 14 ones.
14 ÷ 7: 2 × 7 = 14. Write 2 above the 4.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 0 2 7 7 1 14
714 ÷ 7 = 102
Check. Multiply back: 102 × 7 = 100 × 7 + 2 × 7 = 700 + 14 = 714. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Method. Multiplying and dividing undo each other. 7 times the missing number is 154, so divide 154 by 7.
- Read the number sentence. The box is the number we do not know.7 × ? = 154
- Use the opposite (inverse) operation. To find a missing number in a multiplication, divide the answer by the number you know.154 ÷ 7
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time.154 ÷ 7 = 22
0 2 2 7 1 15 14 - Write the missing number. 7 × 22 = 154
Check. Multiply: 7 × 22 = 154. ✓
Watch out. The missing number is not always the last number. Divide the answer by the number you know.
Method. Multiplying and dividing undo each other. The missing number was divided by 6 to make 34, so multiply 34 by 6 to get it back.
- Read the number sentence. The box is the number we do not know.? ÷ 6 = 34
- Use the opposite (inverse) operation. To find the number that was divided, multiply the answer by 6.34 × 6
- Work it out with short multiplication. Multiply one digit at a time and carry.34 × 6 = 204
H T O 3 4 × 6 2 0 4 2 2 - Write the missing number. 204 ÷ 6 = 34
Check. Divide: 204 ÷ 6 = 34. ✓
Watch out. Read the whole sentence with your answer in the box. It must be true.
Method. Multiplying and dividing undo each other. 5 times the missing number is 365, so divide 365 by 5.
- Read the number sentence. The box is the number we do not know.5 × ? = 365
- Use the opposite (inverse) operation. To find a missing number in a multiplication, divide the answer by the number you know.365 ÷ 5
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time.365 ÷ 5 = 73
0 7 3 5 3 36 15 - Write the missing number. 5 × 73 = 365
Check. Multiply: 5 × 73 = 365. ✓
Watch out. The missing number is not always the last number. Divide the answer by the number you know.
Method. Multiplying and dividing undo each other. The missing number was divided by 4 to make 125, so multiply 125 by 4 to get it back.
- Read the number sentence. The box is the number we do not know.? ÷ 4 = 125
- Use the opposite (inverse) operation. To find the number that was divided, multiply the answer by 4.125 × 4
- Work it out with short multiplication. Multiply one digit at a time and carry.125 × 4 = 500
H T O 1 2 5 × 4 5 0 0 1 2 - Write the missing number. 500 ÷ 4 = 125
Check. Divide: 500 ÷ 4 = 125. ✓
Watch out. Read the whole sentence with your answer in the box. It must be true.
Method. Division is the opposite (inverse) of multiplication. A multiplication fact gives two division facts: divide the answer by either of the numbers.
- Write the multiplication fact. 6 × 23 = 138
- Divide the answer by 6. This gives the other number, 23.138 ÷ 6 = 23
- Divide the answer by 23. This gives the other number, 6.138 ÷ 23 = 6
Check.
| 0 | 2 | 3 | |
| 6 | 1 | 13 | 18 |
138 ÷ 6 = 23. ✓
Watch out. In a division fact the biggest number (the total) comes first.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows what we know and what we need to find out.
- Divide the children into equal teams. 126 children are shared between 6 teams.126 ÷ 6 = 21
0 2 1 6 1 12 6 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.21 children in each team
Check. Multiply back: 21 × 6 = 126. ✓
Watch out. Check you divided by the number of teams (6), not the number of children.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows what we know and what we need to find out.
- Share the money equally. £252 is shared between 3 people, so divide by 3.£252 ÷ 3 = £84
0 8 4 3 2 25 12 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.£84 each
Check. Multiply back: £84 × 3 = £252. ✓
Watch out. Put the £ sign in your answer.
Method. Draw a bar model, choose the operation, then work it out.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows what we know and what we need to find out.
- Divide the pages by the days. The book has 312 pages and Yusuf reads the same number each day for 6 days.312 ÷ 6 = 52
0 5 2 6 3 31 12 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.52 pages each day
Check. Multiply back: 52 × 6 = 312. ✓
Watch out. Carry the remainder from each step to the next digit.
Method. Estimate first. Then do the division carefully and find what Priya did wrong.
- Estimate. 618 is about 600. 6 ÷ 6 = 1, so 600 ÷ 6 = 100.600 ÷ 6 = 100
- Compare with Priya’s answer. The answer should be close to 100. Priya’s 13 is much too small.Priya is wrong.
- Do the division. Use the bus stop method.
1 0 3 6 6 1 18
618 ÷ 6 = 103 - Find the mistake. 1 ÷ 6 is 0, so the tens column needs a 0. Priya missed it out, so her digits slid to the left.The 0 is a place holder.
Check. Multiply back: 103 × 6 = 618. ✓
Watch out. When a step cannot be shared (like 1 ÷ 6), write 0 and carry the 1. Never skip it.
Method. Try some three-digit numbers divided by 3. Look for one with a 2-digit answer and one with a 3-digit answer.
- Try a small number. Use the bus stop method or a known fact.150 ÷ 3 = 50 (2 digits)
- Try a bigger number. 900 ÷ 3 = 300 (3 digits)
- Find the turning point. 297 ÷ 3 = 99 has 2 digits, but 300 ÷ 3 = 100 has 3 digits.297 ÷ 3 = 99 300 ÷ 3 = 100
- Decide. One works and one does not.Sometimes
Check. Multiply back: 99 × 3 = 297. ✓
Watch out. “Sometimes” needs an example that works and an example that does not.
Method. A number divides exactly by 4 when there is no remainder. Divide each number by 4 and look at the remainder.
- Divide each number by 4. Use the bus stop method or chunks.84 ÷ 4 = 21 exactly
90 ÷ 4 = 22 remainder 2
96 ÷ 4 = 24 exactly
102 ÷ 4 = 25 remainder 2 - Pick the numbers with no remainder. 84 and 96
Check. 84 = 4 × 21 and 96 = 4 × 24. ✓
Watch out. A number divides exactly only if the remainder is 0. Quick test: halve it twice. Both halves must be whole numbers.
Method. A number in both the 7 times table and the 8 times table divides exactly by 7 and by 8. Find the multiples of 56 (7 × 8) between 100 and 200.
- List the numbers in the 8 times table between 100 and 200. Count up in 8s.104, 112, 120, 128, 136, 144, 152, 160, 168, 176, 184, 192
- Test which of them divide exactly by 7. Use the bus stop method or the 7 times table.104 ÷ 7 = 14 remainder 6
112 ÷ 7 = 16 exactly
120 ÷ 7 = 17 remainder 1
128 ÷ 7 = 18 remainder 2
136 ÷ 7 = 19 remainder 3
144 ÷ 7 = 20 remainder 4
152 ÷ 7 = 21 remainder 5
160 ÷ 7 = 22 remainder 6
168 ÷ 7 = 24 exactly
176 ÷ 7 = 25 remainder 1
184 ÷ 7 = 26 remainder 2
192 ÷ 7 = 27 remainder 3 - Write the numbers. 112 and 168
Check. 7 × 16 = 112 and 8 × 14 = 112. 7 × 24 = 168 and 8 × 21 = 168. ✓
Watch out. There is a shortcut: numbers in both tables are multiples of 7 × 8 = 56. 56, 112, 168, 224...
Division with remainders
Printable: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · Open this lesson on its own page
Sometimes a number does not divide exactly. Take 29 ÷ 4. The 4 times table goes 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32. 4 × 7 = 28, so 7 groups of 4 fit into 29, but there is 1 left over. The number left over is called the remainder. We write 29 ÷ 4 = 7 remainder 1, or 7 r 1.
The remainder is always smaller than the number you divide by. If it was 4 or more, you could make another group. So when you divide by 4, the remainder can only be 0, 1, 2 or 3.
The bus stop method with a remainder. Divide one digit at a time and carry each remainder, just as before. The last remainder is the answer’s remainder. Try 297 ÷ 4. 2 ÷ 4 = 0 remainder 2, so write 0 and carry 2. 29 ÷ 4 = 7 remainder 1: write 7, carry 1. 17 ÷ 4 = 4 remainder 1: write 4. The last remainder is 1.
| 0 | 7 | 4 | r 1 | |
| 4 | 2 | 29 | 17 |
297 ÷ 4 = 74 remainder 1.
Check with multiplication. Multiply the answer by the number you divided by, then add the remainder. 74 × 4 = 296, and 296 + 1 = 297. ✓
What does the remainder mean in a story? Read the question carefully. 50 pupils go on a trip. Each minibus holds 8 pupils. 50 ÷ 8 = 6 remainder 2.
| The question asks… | What to do with the remainder | Answer for 50 pupils, 8 in a minibus |
|---|---|---|
| How many are left over? | The answer is the remainder. | 2 pupils |
| How many full minibuses? | Ignore the remainder (round down). | 6 minibuses |
| How many minibuses are needed for everyone? | The leftovers need a minibus too. Add 1 (round up). | 7 minibuses |
| Share equally; how many each and how many left? | Give both parts. | 6 each, 2 left over |
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after dividing. Round up means choose the next whole number. Round down means ignore the leftover part.
Key ideas
- A remainder is what is left over: 29 ÷ 4 = 7 remainder 1.
- The remainder is always smaller than the number you divide by.
- Bus stop: carry each remainder; the last remainder goes at the end.
- Check: (answer × divisor) + remainder = the number you started with.
- Read the story: left over (the remainder), full groups (ignore it), enough for everyone (round up), or both parts.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 2 9 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 4: 2 is smaller than 4, so we cannot make a whole ten for each share. Write 0 (this leading 0 is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 tens for 20 ones and carry them to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 9 ones there are 20 + 9 = 29 ones.
29 ÷ 4: 7 × 4 = 28, and 29 − 28 = 1. Write 7 above the 9.
The remainder is 1. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 r 1 4 2 29
29 ÷ 4 = 7 remainder 1
Check. Multiply back: 7 × 4 = 28
28 + 1 (the remainder) = 29. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 4: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 4.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 8 5 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 6 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 8.
Exchange the remainder: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit.1 6 8 25 - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 5 ones there are 20 + 5 = 25 ones.
25 ÷ 6: 4 × 6 = 24, and 25 − 24 = 1. Write 4 above the 5.
The remainder is 1.1 4 r 1 6 8 25 - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 4 r 1 6 8 25
85 ÷ 6 = 14 remainder 1
Check. Multiply back: 14 × 6 = 10 × 6 + 4 × 6 = 60 + 24 = 84
84 + 1 (the remainder) = 85. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (6). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 2 9 7 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 4: 2 is smaller than 4, so we cannot make a whole hundred for each share. Write 0 (this leading 0 is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 hundreds for 20 tens and carry them to the next digit.0 4 2 29 7 - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 9 tens there are 20 + 9 = 29 tens.
29 ÷ 4: 7 × 4 = 28, and 29 − 28 = 1. Write 7 above the 9.
Carry the remainder 1 to the next digit.0 7 4 2 29 17 - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 7 ones there are 10 + 7 = 17 ones.
17 ÷ 4: 4 × 4 = 16, and 17 − 16 = 1. Write 4 above the 7.
The remainder is 1.0 7 4 r 1 4 2 29 17 - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 4 r 1 4 2 29 17
297 ÷ 4 = 74 remainder 1
Check. Multiply back: 74 × 4 = 70 × 4 + 4 × 4 = 280 + 16 = 296
296 + 1 (the remainder) = 297. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 4: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 4.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 8 0 3 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 5 = 1, remainder 3
Write 1 above the 8.
Exchange the remainder: 3 hundreds become 30 tens. Carry 3 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 tens. With the 0 tens there are 30 + 0 = 30 tens.
30 ÷ 5: 6 × 5 = 30. Write 6 above the 0. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 3 ones.
3 ÷ 5: 3 is smaller than 5, so write 0.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 6 0 r 3 5 8 30 3
803 ÷ 5 = 160 remainder 3
Check. Multiply back: 160 × 5 = 100 × 5 + 60 × 5 = 500 + 300 = 800
800 + 3 (the remainder) = 803. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (5). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 50 into equal groups of 8, so we divide.50 ÷ 8
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.50 ÷ 8 = 6 remainder 2
0 6 r 2 8 5 50 - Decide what the remainder means. Every one must be in a group. The remainder still needs a group of its own, so we need one more group. We round UP.6 minibuses are full. The last 2 pupils need another one: 6 + 1 = 7
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.7 minibuses.
Check. Multiply back: 6 × 8 = 48, and 48 + 2 = 50. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the leftovers. They still need somewhere to go, so we round up, not down.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 100 into equal groups of 6, so we divide.100 ÷ 6
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.100 ÷ 6 = 16 remainder 4
0 1 6 r 4 6 1 10 40 - Decide what the remainder means. The question asks how many FULL groups there are. The remainder does not make a full group, so we ignore it.16 boxes and 4 eggs left over. We only count the whole ones: 16.
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.16 boxes.
Check. Multiply back: 16 × 6 = 96, and 96 + 4 = 100. ✓
Watch out. The remainder is not a full group. Do not add 1 here: that is only for when everything must fit.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 53 into equal groups of 6, so we divide.53 ÷ 6
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.53 ÷ 6 = 8 remainder 5
0 8 r 5 6 5 53 - Decide what the remainder means. The question asks how many are LEFT OVER, so the answer is the remainder.remainder = 5
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.There are 5 crayons left over.
Check. Multiply back: 8 × 6 = 48, and 48 + 5 = 53. ✓
Watch out. The answer is the remainder, not the number you get when you divide.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 38 into equal groups of 5, so we divide.38 ÷ 5
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.38 ÷ 5 = 7 remainder 3
0 7 r 3 5 3 38 - Decide what the remainder means. The items are shared equally. The remainder is what cannot be shared out, so it is left over.7 each, remainder 3
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.Each gets 7 and 3 stickers are left over.
Check. Multiply back: 7 × 5 = 35, and 35 + 3 = 38. ✓
Watch out. Write both parts: how many each, and how many are left over.
Method. A division with a remainder can be checked with multiplication: (answer × divisor) + remainder = the number you started with.
- Multiply the answer by the divisor. 9 lots of 5 make the biggest multiple of 5 that fits into 47.9 × 5 = 45
- Take it away from the number. What is left over is the remainder.47 − 45 = 2
- Check the remainder is small enough. A remainder must be smaller than 5.2 is smaller than 5. ✓
Check. 9 × 5 + 2 = 45 + 2 = 47. ✓
Watch out. Check the remainder is smaller than the divisor.
Watch out
Do not always round up, or always ignore the remainder. Read the question: “how many full boxes?” ignores the remainder, but “how many boxes do we need?” rounds up. And a remainder must be smaller than the number you divide by. If it is not, you can still make another group.Exercise 4E Division with remainders
Non-calculatorKey words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 2 9 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 4: 2 is smaller than 4, so we cannot make a whole ten for each share. Write 0 (this leading 0 is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 tens for 20 ones and carry them to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 9 ones there are 20 + 9 = 29 ones.
29 ÷ 4: 7 × 4 = 28, and 29 − 28 = 1. Write 7 above the 9.
The remainder is 1. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 r 1 4 2 29
29 ÷ 4 = 7 remainder 1
Check. Multiply back: 7 × 4 = 28
28 + 1 (the remainder) = 29. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 4: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 4.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 4 7 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 5: 4 is smaller than 5, so we cannot make a whole ten for each share. Write 0 (this leading 0 is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 tens for 40 ones and carry them to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 7 ones there are 40 + 7 = 47 ones.
47 ÷ 5: 9 × 5 = 45, and 47 − 45 = 2. Write 9 above the 7.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 9 r 2 5 4 47
47 ÷ 5 = 9 remainder 2
Check. Multiply back: 9 × 5 = 45
45 + 2 (the remainder) = 47. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 5: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 5.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 3 8 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 6: 3 is smaller than 6, so we cannot make a whole ten for each share. Write 0 (this leading 0 is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 3 tens for 30 ones and carry them to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 8 ones there are 30 + 8 = 38 ones.
38 ÷ 6: 6 × 6 = 36, and 38 − 36 = 2. Write 6 above the 8.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 6 r 2 6 3 38
38 ÷ 6 = 6 remainder 2
Check. Multiply back: 6 × 6 = 36
36 + 2 (the remainder) = 38. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 6: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 6.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 5 9 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 8: 5 is smaller than 8, so we cannot make a whole ten for each share. Write 0 (this leading 0 is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 tens for 50 ones and carry them to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 ones. With the 9 ones there are 50 + 9 = 59 ones.
59 ÷ 8: 7 × 8 = 56, and 59 − 56 = 3. Write 7 above the 9.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 r 3 8 5 59
59 ÷ 8 = 7 remainder 3
Check. Multiply back: 7 × 8 = 56
56 + 3 (the remainder) = 59. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 8: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 8.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 7 3 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 7 = 1
Write 1 above the 7. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 3 ones.
3 ÷ 7: 3 is smaller than 7, so write 0.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 0 r 3 7 7 3
73 ÷ 7 = 10 remainder 3
Check. Multiply back: 10 × 7 = 70
70 + 3 (the remainder) = 73. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (7). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
9 9 5 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 9 = 1
Write 1 above the 9. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 5 ones.
5 ÷ 9: 5 is smaller than 9, so write 0.
The remainder is 5. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 0 r 5 9 9 5
95 ÷ 9 = 10 remainder 5
Check. Multiply back: 10 × 9 = 90
90 + 5 (the remainder) = 95. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (9). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 8 3 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 6 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 8.
Exchange the remainder: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 3 ones there are 20 + 3 = 23 ones.
23 ÷ 6: 3 × 6 = 18, and 23 − 18 = 5. Write 3 above the 3.
The remainder is 5. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 3 r 5 6 8 23
83 ÷ 6 = 13 remainder 5
Check. Multiply back: 13 × 6 = 10 × 6 + 3 × 6 = 60 + 18 = 78
78 + 5 (the remainder) = 83. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (6). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 9 1 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 4 = 2, remainder 1
Write 2 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 1 ten becomes 10 ones. Carry 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 1 ones there are 10 + 1 = 11 ones.
11 ÷ 4: 2 × 4 = 8, and 11 − 8 = 3. Write 2 above the 1.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 2 r 3 4 9 11
91 ÷ 4 = 22 remainder 3
Check. Multiply back: 22 × 4 = 20 × 4 + 2 × 4 = 80 + 8 = 88
88 + 3 (the remainder) = 91. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (4). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 7 5 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 8: 7 is smaller than 8, so we cannot make a whole ten for each share. Write 0 (this leading 0 is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 7 tens for 70 ones and carry them to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 7 that was carried.The carried 7 makes 70 ones. With the 5 ones there are 70 + 5 = 75 ones.
75 ÷ 8: 9 × 8 = 72, and 75 − 72 = 3. Write 9 above the 5.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 9 r 3 8 7 75
75 ÷ 8 = 9 remainder 3
Check. Multiply back: 9 × 8 = 72
72 + 3 (the remainder) = 75. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 8: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 8.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 6 8 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.6 ÷ 3 = 2
Write 2 above the 6. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 8 ones.
8 ÷ 3: 2 × 3 = 6, and 8 − 6 = 2. Write 2 above the 8.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 2 r 2 3 6 8
68 ÷ 3 = 22 remainder 2
Check. Multiply back: 22 × 3 = 20 × 3 + 2 × 3 = 60 + 6 = 66
66 + 2 (the remainder) = 68. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (3). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 9 7 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 7 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 7 ones there are 20 + 7 = 27 ones.
27 ÷ 7: 3 × 7 = 21, and 27 − 21 = 6. Write 3 above the 7.
The remainder is 6. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 3 r 6 7 9 27
97 ÷ 7 = 13 remainder 6
Check. Multiply back: 13 × 7 = 10 × 7 + 3 × 7 = 70 + 21 = 91
91 + 6 (the remainder) = 97. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (7). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 5 2 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 3 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 5.
Exchange the remainder: 2 tens become 20 ones. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 2 ones there are 20 + 2 = 22 ones.
22 ÷ 3: 7 × 3 = 21, and 22 − 21 = 1. Write 7 above the 2.
The remainder is 1. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 7 r 1 3 5 22
52 ÷ 3 = 17 remainder 1
Check. Multiply back: 17 × 3 = 10 × 3 + 7 × 3 = 30 + 21 = 51
51 + 1 (the remainder) = 52. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (3). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 2 5 8 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.2 ÷ 4: 2 is smaller than 4, so we cannot make a whole hundred for each share. Write 0 (this leading 0 is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 2 hundreds for 20 tens and carry them to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 5 tens there are 20 + 5 = 25 tens.
25 ÷ 4: 6 × 4 = 24, and 25 − 24 = 1. Write 6 above the 5.
Carry the remainder 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 8 ones there are 10 + 8 = 18 ones.
18 ÷ 4: 4 × 4 = 16, and 18 − 16 = 2. Write 4 above the 8.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 6 4 r 2 4 2 25 18
258 ÷ 4 = 64 remainder 2
Check. Multiply back: 64 × 4 = 60 × 4 + 4 × 4 = 240 + 16 = 256
256 + 2 (the remainder) = 258. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 4: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 4.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 4 8 5 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.4 ÷ 6: 4 is smaller than 6, so we cannot make a whole hundred for each share. Write 0 (this leading 0 is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 4 hundreds for 40 tens and carry them to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 tens. With the 8 tens there are 40 + 8 = 48 tens.
48 ÷ 6: 8 × 6 = 48. Write 8 above the 8. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 5 ones.
5 ÷ 6: 5 is smaller than 6, so write 0.
The remainder is 5. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 8 0 r 5 6 4 48 5
485 ÷ 6 = 80 remainder 5
Check. Multiply back: 80 × 6 = 480
480 + 5 (the remainder) = 485. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 6: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 6.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
5 7 3 1 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.7 ÷ 5 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 7.
Exchange the remainder: 2 hundreds become 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 3 tens there are 20 + 3 = 23 tens.
23 ÷ 5: 4 × 5 = 20, and 23 − 20 = 3. Write 4 above the 3.
Carry the remainder 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 1 ones there are 30 + 1 = 31 ones.
31 ÷ 5: 6 × 5 = 30, and 31 − 30 = 1. Write 6 above the 1.
The remainder is 1. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 4 6 r 1 5 7 23 31
731 ÷ 5 = 146 remainder 1
Check. Multiply back: 146 × 5 = 100 × 5 + 40 × 5 + 6 × 5 = 500 + 200 + 30 = 730
730 + 1 (the remainder) = 731. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (5). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 9 6 2 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 7 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 2 hundreds become 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 6 tens there are 20 + 6 = 26 tens.
26 ÷ 7: 3 × 7 = 21, and 26 − 21 = 5. Write 3 above the 6.
Carry the remainder 5 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 ones. With the 2 ones there are 50 + 2 = 52 ones.
52 ÷ 7: 7 × 7 = 49, and 52 − 49 = 3. Write 7 above the 2.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 3 7 r 3 7 9 26 52
962 ÷ 7 = 137 remainder 3
Check. Multiply back: 137 × 7 = 100 × 7 + 30 × 7 + 7 × 7 = 700 + 210 + 49 = 959
959 + 3 (the remainder) = 962. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (7). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
3 3 5 8 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.3 ÷ 3 = 1
Write 1 above the 3. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 5 tens.
5 ÷ 3: 1 × 3 = 3, and 5 − 3 = 2. Write 1 above the 5.
Carry the remainder 2 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 ones. With the 8 ones there are 20 + 8 = 28 ones.
28 ÷ 3: 9 × 3 = 27, and 28 − 27 = 1. Write 9 above the 8.
The remainder is 1. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 1 9 r 1 3 3 5 28
358 ÷ 3 = 119 remainder 1
Check. Multiply back: 119 × 3 = 100 × 3 + 10 × 3 + 9 × 3 = 300 + 30 + 27 = 357
357 + 1 (the remainder) = 358. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (3). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
8 5 7 0 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.5 ÷ 8: 5 is smaller than 8, so we cannot make a whole hundred for each share. Write 0 (this leading 0 is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 5 hundreds for 50 tens and carry them to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 5 that was carried.The carried 5 makes 50 tens. With the 7 tens there are 50 + 7 = 57 tens.
57 ÷ 8: 7 × 8 = 56, and 57 − 56 = 1. Write 7 above the 7.
Carry the remainder 1 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 ones. With the 0 ones there are 10 + 0 = 10 ones.
10 ÷ 8: 1 × 8 = 8, and 10 − 8 = 2. Write 1 above the 0.
The remainder is 2. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 7 1 r 2 8 5 57 10
570 ÷ 8 = 71 remainder 2
Check. Multiply back: 71 × 8 = 70 × 8 + 1 × 8 = 560 + 8 = 568
568 + 2 (the remainder) = 570. ✓
Watch out. The first digit is smaller than 8: write 0 and carry it. The remainder is always smaller than 8.
Method. A division with a remainder can be checked with multiplication: (answer × divisor) + remainder = the number you started with.
- Multiply the answer by the divisor. 9 lots of 5 make the biggest multiple of 5 that fits into 47.9 × 5 = 45
- Take it away from the number. What is left over is the remainder.47 − 45 = 2
- Check the remainder is small enough. A remainder must be smaller than 5.2 is smaller than 5. ✓
Check. 9 × 5 + 2 = 45 + 2 = 47. ✓
Watch out. Check the remainder is smaller than the divisor.
Method. A division with a remainder can be checked with multiplication: (answer × divisor) + remainder = the number you started with.
- Multiply the answer by the divisor. 7 lots of 8 make the biggest multiple of 8 that fits into 62.7 × 8 = 56
- Take it away from the number. What is left over is the remainder.62 − 56 = 6
- Check the remainder is small enough. A remainder must be smaller than 8.6 is smaller than 8. ✓
Check. 7 × 8 + 6 = 56 + 6 = 62. ✓
Watch out. Check the remainder is smaller than the divisor.
Method. A division with a remainder can be checked with multiplication: (answer × divisor) + remainder = the number you started with.
- Take the remainder away from the number. The remainder is the part that does not fit into groups of 6. What is left divides exactly.53 − 5 = 48
- Divide what is left by 6. Use a times table fact or the bus stop method.48 ÷ 6 = 8
- Check. 8 × 6 = 48
48 + 5 (the remainder) = 53
Check. 8 × 6 + 5 = 48 + 5 = 53. ✓
Watch out. Check the remainder is smaller than the divisor.
Method. A division with a remainder can be checked with multiplication: (answer × divisor) + remainder = the number you started with.
- Take the remainder away from the number. The remainder is the part that does not fit into groups of 9. What is left divides exactly.79 − 7 = 72
- Divide what is left by 9. Use a times table fact or the bus stop method.72 ÷ 9 = 8
- Check. 8 × 9 = 72
72 + 7 (the remainder) = 79
Check. 8 × 9 + 7 = 72 + 7 = 79. ✓
Watch out. Check the remainder is smaller than the divisor.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 53 into equal groups of 6, so we divide.53 ÷ 6
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.53 ÷ 6 = 8 remainder 5
0 8 r 5 6 5 53 - Decide what the remainder means. The question asks how many are LEFT OVER, so the answer is the remainder.remainder = 5
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.There are 5 crayons left over.
Check. Multiply back: 8 × 6 = 48, and 48 + 5 = 53. ✓
Watch out. The answer is the remainder, not the number you get when you divide.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 100 into equal groups of 7, so we divide.100 ÷ 7
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.100 ÷ 7 = 14 remainder 2
0 1 4 r 2 7 1 10 30 - Decide what the remainder means. The question asks how many are LEFT OVER, so the answer is the remainder.remainder = 2
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.There are 2 marbles left over.
Check. Multiply back: 14 × 7 = 98, and 98 + 2 = 100. ✓
Watch out. The answer is the remainder, not the number you get when you divide.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 85 into equal groups of 9, so we divide.85 ÷ 9
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.85 ÷ 9 = 9 remainder 4
0 9 r 4 9 8 85 - Decide what the remainder means. The question asks how many are LEFT OVER, so the answer is the remainder.remainder = 4
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.There are 4 children left over.
Check. Multiply back: 9 × 9 = 81, and 81 + 4 = 85. ✓
Watch out. The answer is the remainder, not the number you get when you divide.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 75 into equal groups of 8, so we divide.75 ÷ 8
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.75 ÷ 8 = 9 remainder 3
0 9 r 3 8 7 75 - Decide what the remainder means. The question asks how many FULL groups there are. The remainder does not make a full group, so we ignore it.9 boxes and 3 buns left over. We only count the whole ones: 9.
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.9 boxes.
Check. Multiply back: 9 × 8 = 72, and 72 + 3 = 75. ✓
Watch out. The remainder is not a full group. Do not add 1 here: that is only for when everything must fit.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 90 into equal groups of 7, so we divide.90 ÷ 7
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.90 ÷ 7 = 12 remainder 6
1 2 r 6 7 9 20 - Decide what the remainder means. The question asks how many FULL groups there are. The remainder does not make a full group, so we ignore it.12 pieces and 6 cm left over. We only count the whole ones: 12.
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.12 pieces.
Check. Multiply back: 12 × 7 = 84, and 84 + 6 = 90. ✓
Watch out. The remainder is not a full group. Do not add 1 here: that is only for when everything must fit.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 100 into equal groups of 9, so we divide.100 ÷ 9
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.100 ÷ 9 = 11 remainder 1
0 1 1 r 1 9 1 10 10 - Decide what the remainder means. The question asks how many FULL groups there are. The remainder does not make a full group, so we ignore it.11 tickets and 1 pounds left over. We only count the whole ones: 11.
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.11 tickets.
Check. Multiply back: 11 × 9 = 99, and 99 + 1 = 100. ✓
Watch out. The remainder is not a full group. Do not add 1 here: that is only for when everything must fit.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 70 into equal groups of 4, so we divide.70 ÷ 4
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.70 ÷ 4 = 17 remainder 2
1 7 r 2 4 7 30 - Decide what the remainder means. Every one must be in a group. The remainder still needs a group of its own, so we need one more group. We round UP.17 cars are full. The last 2 children need another one: 17 + 1 = 18
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.18 cars.
Check. Multiply back: 17 × 4 = 68, and 68 + 2 = 70. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the leftovers. They still need somewhere to go, so we round up, not down.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 100 into equal groups of 6, so we divide.100 ÷ 6
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.100 ÷ 6 = 16 remainder 4
0 1 6 r 4 6 1 10 40 - Decide what the remainder means. Every one must be in a group. The remainder still needs a group of its own, so we need one more group. We round UP.16 tables are full. The last 4 guests need another one: 16 + 1 = 17
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.17 tables.
Check. Multiply back: 16 × 6 = 96, and 96 + 4 = 100. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the leftovers. They still need somewhere to go, so we round up, not down.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 130 into equal groups of 8, so we divide.130 ÷ 8
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.130 ÷ 8 = 16 remainder 2
0 1 6 r 2 8 1 13 50 - Decide what the remainder means. Every one must be in a group. The remainder still needs a group of its own, so we need one more group. We round UP.16 days are full. The last 2 pages need another one: 16 + 1 = 17
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.17 days.
Check. Multiply back: 16 × 8 = 128, and 128 + 2 = 130. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the leftovers. They still need somewhere to go, so we round up, not down.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 47 into equal groups of 6, so we divide.47 ÷ 6
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.47 ÷ 6 = 7 remainder 5
0 7 r 5 6 4 47 - Decide what the remainder means. The items are shared equally. The remainder is what cannot be shared out, so it is left over.7 each, remainder 5
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.Each gets 7 and 5 sweets are left over.
Check. Multiply back: 7 × 6 = 42, and 42 + 5 = 47. ✓
Watch out. Write both parts: how many each, and how many are left over.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 83 into equal groups of 4, so we divide.83 ÷ 4
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.83 ÷ 4 = 20 remainder 3
2 0 r 3 4 8 3 - Decide what the remainder means. The items are shared equally. The remainder is what cannot be shared out, so it is left over.20 each, remainder 3
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.Each gets 20 and 3 cards are left over.
Check. Multiply back: 20 × 4 = 80, and 80 + 3 = 83. ✓
Watch out. Write both parts: how many each, and how many are left over.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 95 into equal groups of 9, so we divide.95 ÷ 9
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.95 ÷ 9 = 10 remainder 5
1 0 r 5 9 9 5 - Decide what the remainder means. The items are shared equally. The remainder is what cannot be shared out, so it is left over.10 each, remainder 5
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.Each gets 10 and 5 marbles are left over.
Check. Multiply back: 10 × 9 = 90, and 90 + 5 = 95. ✓
Watch out. Write both parts: how many each, and how many are left over.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 100 into equal groups of 8, so we divide.100 ÷ 8
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.100 ÷ 8 = 12 remainder 4
0 1 2 r 4 8 1 10 20 - Decide what the remainder means. We want the full groups and also what is left over, so we use both parts of the answer.12 pieces, remainder 4
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.12 pieces and 4 cm left over.
Check. Multiply back: 12 × 8 = 96, and 96 + 4 = 100. ✓
Watch out. Write both parts: the full groups and what is left over.
Method. First find how many full boxes the farmer can fill (divide, and ignore the remainder). Then multiply by the price of one box.
- Step 1: how many full boxes? 125 eggs are put into boxes of 6, so divide.125 ÷ 6 = 20 remainder 5
0 2 0 r 5 6 1 12 5 - Decide what to do with the remainder. Only full boxes are sold, so we ignore the 5 eggs left over.20 full boxes
- Step 2: find the money. Each full box sells for £2, so multiply by 2.2 × 2 = 4, so 2 tens × 2 = 4 tens
20 × 2 = £40 - Write the answer. £40
Check. Multiply back: 20 × 6 = 120, and 120 + 5 = 125. ✓
Watch out. The 5 eggs left over cannot be sold in a full box. Do not round up here.
Method. Check Mei’s answer by multiplying back: (answer × divisor) + remainder should equal the number we started with.
- Multiply back. Multiply Mei’s answer by 4 and add her remainder.10 × 4 = 40, 40 + 2 = 42
- Compare with the starting number. We should get 52.42 is not 52, so Mei is wrong.
- Work out the correct answer. Use the bus stop method and carry the remainder.
1 3 4 5 12
52 ÷ 4 = 13 with no remainder - Find Mei’s mistake. She divided 5 by 4 and 2 by 4 separately and forgot to carry the remainder 1 from the 5 to the 2.5 ÷ 4 = 1 r 1, then the 1 ten is carried: 12 ÷ 4 = 3
Check. 13 × 4 = 52. ✓
Watch out. After each digit, carry the remainder to the next digit. Do not lose it.
Method. The remainder must be smaller than 5. Think about the leftovers after making groups of 5.
- Try the numbers after a multiple of 5. 20 is a multiple of 5. Divide the numbers after it by 5.20 ÷ 5 = 4 remainder 0
21 ÷ 5 = 4 remainder 1
22 ÷ 5 = 4 remainder 2
23 ÷ 5 = 4 remainder 3
24 ÷ 5 = 4 remainder 4 - Look at what happens next. 25 is the next multiple of 5, so the pattern starts again.25 ÷ 5 = 5 remainder 0
- Write the remainders. 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4
Check. There are 5 possible remainders. We cannot have a remainder of 5 because that would make another group. ✓
Watch out. The remainder is always smaller than the number you divide by.
Method. The remainder is what is left after making as many groups of 5 as you can. Think about whether 6 could be left.
- Look at the remainder. The remainder is 6, and 6 is more than 5.6 > 5
- Say what would happen. With 6 left over, another group of 5 could be made. Then only 1 would be left over.6 = 5 + 1, so there is one more group and the remainder is 1
- Answer. A remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by, so 6 is too big.
Check. For example, 36 ÷ 5 is 7 remainder 1, not 6 remainder 6. ✓
Watch out. If your remainder is as big as the divisor, you stopped dividing too soon.
Method. Try some odd numbers. Think about what happens when you share an odd number into 2 equal groups.
- Try some odd numbers. Divide each by 2.7 ÷ 2 = 3 remainder 1
15 ÷ 2 = 7 remainder 1
33 ÷ 2 = 16 remainder 1
101 ÷ 2 = 50 remainder 1 - Explain why. An odd number is one more than an even number. Even numbers share exactly into 2, so 1 is always left over.odd = even + 1
- Decide. Always
Check. 2 × 3 + 1 = 7 and 2 × 7 + 1 = 15. ✓
Watch out. “Always” needs a reason, not just examples.
Method. List the numbers between 20 and 40 that leave remainder 3 when divided by 5. Then test which of them leave remainder 1 when divided by 4.
- Find the numbers with remainder 3 when divided by 5. They are 3 more than a multiple of 5: 20, 25, 30, 35 plus 3.23, 28, 33, 38
- Divide each by 4. Use the 4 times table: 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32, 36.23 ÷ 4 = 5 remainder 3
28 ÷ 4 = 7 remainder 0
33 ÷ 4 = 8 remainder 1
38 ÷ 4 = 9 remainder 2 - Choose the number with remainder 1. 33
Check. 33 ÷ 5 = 6 remainder 3 and 33 ÷ 4 = 8 remainder 1. ✓
Watch out. Check both clues, not just one.
Method. A division with a remainder can be undone: multiply the answer by the divisor, then add the remainder.
- Write what the sentence means. The number was divided by 6 to make 14 with 5 left over.? ÷ 6 = 14 remainder 5
- Multiply the answer by 6. 14 groups of 6 make the part that divided exactly.14 × 6 = 10 × 6 + 4 × 6 = 60 + 24 = 84
- Add the remainder. The 5 that was left over goes back.84 + 5 = 89
Check.
| 1 | 4 | r 5 | |
| 6 | 8 | 29 |
89 ÷ 6 = 14 remainder 5. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget to add the remainder at the end.
Scaling, correspondence and multiplying three numbers
Printable: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · Open this lesson on its own page
Scaling. Alex has 6 marbles. Ben has 4 times as many marbles as Alex. “4 times as many” means 4 equal groups, and each group is the same size as Alex’s 6. So Ben has 4 × 6 = 24 marbles. We can draw it as a bar model: Alex has one box, and Ben has four boxes the same size.
The same picture helps you go backwards. If Ben has 24 marbles, which is 4 times as many as Alex, then 4 boxes make 24, so one box is 24 ÷ 4 = 6. Alex has 6.
Be careful: “4 times as many” is multiplying by 4. “4 more” is adding 4. They are very different! Alex has 6, so 4 more is 10 but 4 times as many is 24. We use scaling for lengths, heights, masses and money too: “3 times as long”, “5 times as heavy”, “twice the price”.
Correspondence. Priya has 3 hats and 5 tops. She picks one hat and one top. How many different outfits can she make? Each hat can go with any of the 5 tops. That is 5 outfits for the first hat, 5 for the second and 5 for the third. Make a table: each box is one outfit.
| hat \ top | stripy | spotty | plain | checked | yellow |
| red hat | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
| blue hat | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 |
| green hat | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 |
There are 3 rows of 5 boxes. It is an array! So the number of outfits is 3 × 5 = 15. We say that 3 objects are connected to 5 objects in 3 × 5 ways. It works for roads, meals, sandwiches and lots more. If Priya also has 2 scarves, each of the 15 outfits can have either scarf: 15 × 2 = 30.
Multiplying three numbers. You can multiply three numbers in any order. Look for two numbers that make an easy answer, like a pair that makes 10 or 100, and multiply those first. 5 × 17 × 2: 5 × 2 = 10, then 17 × 10 = 170. Much easier than 5 × 17 first!
Key words. Scaling means making an amount a number of times bigger or smaller. A combination is one choice from each group put together.
Key ideas
- “n times as many” means n equal groups: multiply the small amount by n.
- To find the small amount, divide the big amount by n.
- “More than” means add. “Times as many” means multiply.
- If every one of n things can go with every one of m things, there are n × m combinations.
- Three groups of choices: multiply all three numbers.
- You can multiply three numbers in any order. Make 10 or 100 first if you can.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. 6 times as many means 6 equal groups, each the same size as the smaller amount. Multiply the smaller amount by 6.
- Draw a bar model. Maya has one box. Dad has 6 boxes the same size.
- Choose the operation. 6 equal boxes: multiply the size of one box by 6.14 × 6
- Work it out. Use a written method if you need to.14 × 6 = 84
T O 1 4 × 6 8 4 2 - Write the answer. Include the unit.84 stickers
Check. Divide back: 84 ÷ 6 = 14. ✓
Watch out. “6 times as many” is multiplying by 6. It is not adding 6.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. 4 times as many means 4 equal groups, each the same size as the smaller amount. Multiply the smaller amount by 4.
- Draw a bar model. Zainab has one box. Liam has 4 boxes the same size.
- Choose the operation. 4 equal boxes: multiply the size of one box by 4.£25 × 4
- Work it out. Use a written method if you need to.£25 × 4 = £100
H T O 2 5 × 4 1 0 0 1 2 - Write the answer. Include the unit.£100
Check. Divide back: £100 ÷ 4 = £25. ✓
Watch out. “4 times as many” is multiplying by 4. It is not adding 4.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. Noah has 4 times as many as Priya. So Noah’s amount is split into 4 equal boxes and Priya has one box. Divide by 4.
- Draw a bar model. Noah has 4 equal boxes. Priya has one box the same size.
- Choose the operation. We know the total of the 4 boxes and want the size of one box: divide by 4.96 ÷ 4
- Work it out. Use the bus stop method.96 ÷ 4 = 24
2 4 4 9 16 - Write the answer. Include the unit.24 books
Check. Multiply back: 24 × 4 = 96. ✓
Watch out. The one with “times as many” has the bigger amount. To find the smaller amount, divide, do not multiply.
Key words. A combination is one choice from each group put together. To find how many combinations there are, multiply the numbers of choices.
Method. Each choice from one group can be paired with every choice from the other group. So multiply the numbers of choices together.
- Take just one hat. Pick the first hat. It can go with any of the 5 tops, so that makes 5 outfits.1 hat → 5 outfits
- Do the same for every hat. All the hats have the same choices. There are 3 hats, so there are 3 groups of 5 outfits.5 + 5 + 5 = 15
- Show every choice in a table. Each box is one outfit: one hat with one top. Count the boxes: it is an array.
hat \ top top 1 top 2 top 3 top 4 top 5 hat 1 1 2 3 4 5 hat 2 6 7 8 9 10 hat 3 11 12 13 14 15 - Multiply. 3 rows of 5 is a multiplication.3 × 5 = 15
- Write the answer. Say what the number means.15 different outfits
Check. Swap the numbers: 5 × 3 = 15. ✓
Watch out. Do not add the numbers. 3 + 5 = 8 would only count each item once. Every hat goes with every top, so multiply.
Key words. A combination is one choice from each group put together. To find how many combinations there are, multiply the numbers of choices.
Method. Each choice from one group can be paired with every choice from the other group. So multiply the numbers of choices together.
- Take just one flavour. Pick the first flavour. It can go with any of the 6 toppings, so that makes 6 ice creams.1 flavour → 6 ice creams
- Do the same for every flavour. All the flavours have the same choices. There are 4 flavours, so there are 4 groups of 6 ice creams.6 + 6 + 6 + 6 = 24
- Show every choice in a table. Each box is one ice cream: one flavour with one topping. Count the boxes: it is an array.
flavour \ topping topping 1 topping 2 topping 3 topping 4 topping 5 topping 6 flavour 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 flavour 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 flavour 3 13 14 15 16 17 18 flavour 4 19 20 21 22 23 24 - Multiply. 4 rows of 6 is a multiplication.4 × 6 = 24
- Write the answer. Say what the number means.24 different ice creams
Check. Swap the numbers: 6 × 4 = 24. ✓
Watch out. Do not add the numbers. 3 + 5 = 8 would only count each item once. Every flavour goes with every topping, so multiply.
Key words. A combination is one choice from each group put together. To find how many combinations there are, multiply the numbers of choices.
Method. Each choice from one group can be paired with every choice from the other group. So multiply the numbers of choices together.
- Take just one road. Pick the first road. It can go with any of the 4 roads, so that makes 4 routes.1 road → 4 routes
- Do the same for every road. All the roads have the same choices. There are 3 roads, so there are 3 groups of 4 routes.4 + 4 + 4 = 12
- Multiply. 3 rows of 4 is a multiplication.3 × 4 = 12
- Write the answer. Say what the number means.12 different routes
Check. Swap the numbers: 4 × 3 = 12. ✓
Watch out. Do not add the numbers. 3 + 5 = 8 would only count each item once. Every road goes with every road, so multiply.
Key words. A combination is one choice from each group put together. To find how many combinations there are, multiply the numbers of choices.
Method. Each choice from one group can be paired with every choice from the other group. So multiply the numbers of choices together.
- Find how many choices there are for the first two. Each of the 3 skirts can go with each of the 4 tops.3 × 4 = 12
- Now bring in the pairs of shoes. Each of those 12 choices can go with each of the 2 pairs of shoes.12 × 2 = 24
- Write the answer. Say what the number means.24 different outfits
Check. Multiply in a different order: 4 × 2 = 8, then 8 × 3 = 24. ✓
Watch out. Do not add the numbers. 3 + 5 = 8 would only count each item once. Every skirt goes with every top, so multiply.
Method. Each of the 4 starters goes with every main, so the 36 meals are 4 equal groups. Division undoes multiplication.
- Write it as a multiplication with a missing number. 4 starters × the number of mains = 36 meals.4 × ? = 36
- Divide to find the missing number. Share the 36 meals between the 4 starters.36 ÷ 4 = 9
0 9 4 3 36 - Write the answer. 9 mains
Check. Multiply back: 4 × 9 = 36. ✓
Watch out. Use the opposite operation: if the total is known, divide by the number you know.
Key words. You can multiply three numbers in any order and the answer is the same.
Method. You can multiply three numbers in any order. Look for two numbers that make an easy answer (like a pair that makes 10 or 100) and multiply those first.
- Look for a pair that is easy to multiply. 5 × 2 = 10, and multiplying by 10 is easy.5 × 2 = 10
- Multiply by the last number, 17. Multiplying by 10 moves every digit 1 place to the left.10 × 17: move the digits of 17 1 place to the left.
10 × 17 = 170 - Write the answer. 5 × 17 × 2 = 170
Check. Try a different order: 34 × 5 = 170. ✓
Watch out. You can multiply in any order. Pick the pair that gives an easy answer first.
Key words. You can multiply three numbers in any order and the answer is the same.
Method. You can multiply three numbers in any order. Look for two numbers that make an easy answer (like a pair that makes 10 or 100) and multiply those first.
- Look for a pair that is easy to multiply. 25 × 4 = 100, and multiplying by 100 is easy.25 × 4 = 100
- Multiply by the last number, 6. Multiplying by 100 moves every digit 2 places to the left.100 × 6: move the digits of 6 2 places to the left.
100 × 6 = 600 - Write the answer. 25 × 4 × 6 = 600
Check. Try a different order: 24 × 25 = 600. ✓
Watch out. You can multiply in any order. Pick the pair that gives an easy answer first.
Watch out
“Times as many” is not “more”. 4 times as many as 6 is 24 (multiply). 4 more than 6 is 10 (add). For outfits, do not add the numbers: 3 hats and 5 tops make 3 × 5 = 15 outfits, not 3 + 5 = 8, because every hat goes with every top.Exercise 4F Scaling, correspondence and three numbers
Non-calculatorKey words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. 5 times as many means 5 equal groups, each the same size as the smaller amount. Multiply the smaller amount by 5.
- Draw a bar model. Ella has one box. Omar has 5 boxes the same size.
- Choose the operation. 5 equal boxes: multiply the size of one box by 5.18 × 5
- Work it out. Use a written method if you need to.18 × 5 = 90
T O 1 8 × 5 9 0 4 - Write the answer. Include the unit.90 stickers
Check. Divide back: 90 ÷ 5 = 18. ✓
Watch out. “5 times as many” is multiplying by 5. It is not adding 5.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. 3 times as many means 3 equal groups, each the same size as the smaller amount. Multiply the smaller amount by 3.
- Draw a bar model. Pencil has one box. Ruler has 3 boxes the same size.
- Choose the operation. 3 equal boxes: multiply the size of one box by 3.17 × 3
- Work it out. Use a written method if you need to.17 × 3 = 51
T O 1 7 × 3 5 1 2 - Write the answer. Include the unit.51 cm
Check. Divide back: 51 ÷ 3 = 17. ✓
Watch out. “3 times as many” is multiplying by 3. It is not adding 3.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. 4 times as many means 4 equal groups, each the same size as the smaller amount. Multiply the smaller amount by 4.
- Draw a bar model. Apples has one box. Melon has 4 boxes the same size.
- Choose the operation. 4 equal boxes: multiply the size of one box by 4.125 × 4
- Work it out. Use a written method if you need to.125 × 4 = 500
H T O 1 2 5 × 4 5 0 0 1 2 - Write the answer. Include the unit.500 g
Check. Divide back: 500 ÷ 4 = 125. ✓
Watch out. “4 times as many” is multiplying by 4. It is not adding 4.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. 6 times as many means 6 equal groups, each the same size as the smaller amount. Multiply the smaller amount by 6.
- Draw a bar model. Pen has one box. Book has 6 boxes the same size.
- Choose the operation. 6 equal boxes: multiply the size of one box by 6.45p × 6
- Work it out. Use a written method if you need to.45p × 6 = 270p
H T O 4 5 × 6 2 7 0 2 3 - Write the answer. Include the unit.270p
Check. Divide back: 270p ÷ 6 = 45p. ✓
Watch out. “6 times as many” is multiplying by 6. It is not adding 6.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. Dad has 6 times as many as Ben. So Dad’s amount is split into 6 equal boxes and Ben has one box. Divide by 6.
- Draw a bar model. Dad has 6 equal boxes. Ben has one box the same size.
- Choose the operation. We know the total of the 6 boxes and want the size of one box: divide by 6.84 ÷ 6
- Work it out. Use the bus stop method.84 ÷ 6 = 14
1 4 6 8 24 - Write the answer. Include the unit.14 stamps
Check. Multiply back: 14 × 6 = 84. ✓
Watch out. The one with “times as many” has the bigger amount. To find the smaller amount, divide, do not multiply.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. Tree has 4 times as many as Shed. So Tree’s amount is split into 4 equal boxes and Shed has one box. Divide by 4.
- Draw a bar model. Tree has 4 equal boxes. Shed has one box the same size.
- Choose the operation. We know the total of the 4 boxes and want the size of one box: divide by 4.96 ÷ 4
- Work it out. Use the bus stop method.96 ÷ 4 = 24
2 4 4 9 16 - Write the answer. Include the unit.24 m
Check. Multiply back: 24 × 4 = 96. ✓
Watch out. The one with “times as many” has the bigger amount. To find the smaller amount, divide, do not multiply.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. Bike has 4 times as many as Helmet. So Bike’s amount is split into 4 equal boxes and Helmet has one box. Divide by 4.
- Draw a bar model. Bike has 4 equal boxes. Helmet has one box the same size.
- Choose the operation. We know the total of the 4 boxes and want the size of one box: divide by 4.£192 ÷ 4
- Work it out. Use the bus stop method.£192 ÷ 4 = £48
0 4 8 4 1 19 32 - Write the answer. Include the unit.£48
Check. Multiply back: £48 × 4 = £192. ✓
Watch out. The one with “times as many” has the bigger amount. To find the smaller amount, divide, do not multiply.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. Lorry has 5 times as many as Van. So Lorry’s amount is split into 5 equal boxes and Van has one box. Divide by 5.
- Draw a bar model. Lorry has 5 equal boxes. Van has one box the same size.
- Choose the operation. We know the total of the 5 boxes and want the size of one box: divide by 5.135 ÷ 5
- Work it out. Use the bus stop method.135 ÷ 5 = 27
0 2 7 5 1 13 35 - Write the answer. Include the unit.27 boxes
Check. Multiply back: 27 × 5 = 135. ✓
Watch out. The one with “times as many” has the bigger amount. To find the smaller amount, divide, do not multiply.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. 6 times as many means 6 equal groups, each the same size as the smaller amount. Multiply the smaller amount by 6.
- Draw a bar model. Sam has one box. Tia has 6 boxes the same size.
- Choose the operation. 6 equal boxes: multiply the size of one box by 6.8 × 6
- Work it out. Use a written method if you need to.8 × 6 = 48
- Write the answer. Include the unit.48 books
Check. Divide back: 48 ÷ 6 = 8. ✓
Watch out. “6 times as many” is multiplying by 6. It is not adding 6.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. Tia has 6 times as many as Sam. So Tia’s amount is split into 6 equal boxes and Sam has one box. Divide by 6.
- Draw a bar model. Tia has 6 equal boxes. Sam has one box the same size.
- Choose the operation. We know the total of the 6 boxes and want the size of one box: divide by 6.48 ÷ 6
- Work it out. Use the bus stop method.48 ÷ 6 = 8
0 8 6 4 48 - Write the answer. Include the unit.8 books
Check. Multiply back: 8 × 6 = 48. ✓
Watch out. The one with “times as many” has the bigger amount. To find the smaller amount, divide, do not multiply.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. 7 times as many means 7 equal groups, each the same size as the smaller amount. Multiply the smaller amount by 7.
- Draw a bar model. Kai has one box. Jo has 7 boxes the same size.
- Choose the operation. 7 equal boxes: multiply the size of one box by 7.9 × 7
- Work it out. Use a written method if you need to.9 × 7 = 63
- Write the answer. Include the unit.63 marbles
Check. Divide back: 63 ÷ 7 = 9. ✓
Watch out. “7 times as many” is multiplying by 7. It is not adding 7.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. Jo has 7 times as many as Kai. So Jo’s amount is split into 7 equal boxes and Kai has one box. Divide by 7.
- Draw a bar model. Jo has 7 equal boxes. Kai has one box the same size.
- Choose the operation. We know the total of the 7 boxes and want the size of one box: divide by 7.63 ÷ 7
- Work it out. Use the bus stop method.63 ÷ 7 = 9
0 9 7 6 63 - Write the answer. Include the unit.9 marbles
Check. Multiply back: 9 × 7 = 63. ✓
Watch out. The one with “times as many” has the bigger amount. To find the smaller amount, divide, do not multiply.
Key words. A combination is one choice from each group put together. To find how many combinations there are, multiply the numbers of choices.
Method. Each choice from one group can be paired with every choice from the other group. So multiply the numbers of choices together.
- Take just one T-shirt. Pick the first T-shirt. It can go with any of the 6 pairs of shorts, so that makes 6 outfits.1 T-shirt → 6 outfits
- Do the same for every T-shirt. All the T-shirts have the same choices. There are 4 T-shirts, so there are 4 groups of 6 outfits.6 + 6 + 6 + 6 = 24
- Show every choice in a table. Each box is one outfit: one T-shirt with one pair of shorts. Count the boxes: it is an array.
T-shirt \ pair of shorts pair of shorts 1 pair of shorts 2 pair of shorts 3 pair of shorts 4 pair of shorts 5 pair of shorts 6 T-shirt 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 T-shirt 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 T-shirt 3 13 14 15 16 17 18 T-shirt 4 19 20 21 22 23 24 - Multiply. 4 rows of 6 is a multiplication.4 × 6 = 24
- Write the answer. Say what the number means.24 different outfits
Check. Swap the numbers: 6 × 4 = 24. ✓
Watch out. Do not add the numbers. 3 + 5 = 8 would only count each item once. Every T-shirt goes with every pair of shorts, so multiply.
Key words. A combination is one choice from each group put together. To find how many combinations there are, multiply the numbers of choices.
Method. Each choice from one group can be paired with every choice from the other group. So multiply the numbers of choices together.
- Take just one starter. Pick the first starter. It can go with any of the 4 mains, so that makes 4 meals.1 starter → 4 meals
- Do the same for every starter. All the starters have the same choices. There are 5 starters, so there are 5 groups of 4 meals.4 + 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 = 20
- Show every choice in a table. Each box is one meal: one starter with one main. Count the boxes: it is an array.
starter \ main main 1 main 2 main 3 main 4 starter 1 1 2 3 4 starter 2 5 6 7 8 starter 3 9 10 11 12 starter 4 13 14 15 16 starter 5 17 18 19 20 - Multiply. 5 rows of 4 is a multiplication.5 × 4 = 20
- Write the answer. Say what the number means.20 different meals
Check. Swap the numbers: 4 × 5 = 20. ✓
Watch out. Do not add the numbers. 3 + 5 = 8 would only count each item once. Every starter goes with every main, so multiply.
Key words. A combination is one choice from each group put together. To find how many combinations there are, multiply the numbers of choices.
Method. Each choice from one group can be paired with every choice from the other group. So multiply the numbers of choices together.
- Take just one type of bread. Pick the first type of bread. It can go with any of the 5 fillings, so that makes 5 sandwiches.1 type of bread → 5 sandwiches
- Do the same for every type of bread. All the types of bread have the same choices. There are 6 types of bread, so there are 6 groups of 5 sandwiches.5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 = 30
- Show every choice in a table. Each box is one sandwich: one type of bread with one filling. Count the boxes: it is an array.
type of bread \ filling filling 1 filling 2 filling 3 filling 4 filling 5 type of bread 1 1 2 3 4 5 type of bread 2 6 7 8 9 10 type of bread 3 11 12 13 14 15 type of bread 4 16 17 18 19 20 type of bread 5 21 22 23 24 25 type of bread 6 26 27 28 29 30 - Multiply. 6 rows of 5 is a multiplication.6 × 5 = 30
- Write the answer. Say what the number means.30 different sandwiches
Check. Swap the numbers: 5 × 6 = 30. ✓
Watch out. Do not add the numbers. 3 + 5 = 8 would only count each item once. Every type of bread goes with every filling, so multiply.
Key words. A combination is one choice from each group put together. To find how many combinations there are, multiply the numbers of choices.
Method. Each choice from one group can be paired with every choice from the other group. So multiply the numbers of choices together.
- Take just one drink. Pick the first drink. It can go with any of the 3 cakes, so that makes 3 pairs.1 drink → 3 pairs
- Do the same for every drink. All the drinks have the same choices. There are 7 drinks, so there are 7 groups of 3 pairs.7 groups of 3
- Multiply. 7 rows of 3 is a multiplication.7 × 3 = 21
- Write the answer. Say what the number means.21 different pairs
Check. Swap the numbers: 3 × 7 = 21. ✓
Watch out. Do not add the numbers. 3 + 5 = 8 would only count each item once. Every drink goes with every cake, so multiply.
Key words. A combination is one choice from each group put together. To find how many combinations there are, multiply the numbers of choices.
Method. Each choice from one group can be paired with every choice from the other group. So multiply the numbers of choices together.
- Find how many choices there are for the first two. Each of the 3 skirts can go with each of the 4 tops.3 × 4 = 12
- Now bring in the scarves. Each of those 12 choices can go with each of the 2 scarves.12 × 2 = 24
- Write the answer. Say what the number means.24 different outfits
Check. Multiply in a different order: 4 × 2 = 8, then 8 × 3 = 24. ✓
Watch out. Do not add the numbers. 3 + 5 = 8 would only count each item once. Every skirt goes with every top, so multiply.
Key words. A combination is one choice from each group put together. To find how many combinations there are, multiply the numbers of choices.
Method. Each choice from one group can be paired with every choice from the other group. So multiply the numbers of choices together.
- Find how many choices there are for the first two. Each of the 2 starters can go with each of the 5 mains.2 × 5 = 10
- Now bring in the puddings. Each of those 10 choices can go with each of the 4 puddings.10 × 4 = 40
- Write the answer. Say what the number means.40 different meals
Check. Multiply in a different order: 5 × 4 = 20, then 20 × 2 = 40. ✓
Watch out. Do not add the numbers. 3 + 5 = 8 would only count each item once. Every starter goes with every main, so multiply.
Method. Each of the 4 starters goes with every main, so the 36 meals are 4 equal groups. Division undoes multiplication.
- Write it as a multiplication with a missing number. 4 starters × the number of mains = 36 meals.4 × ? = 36
- Divide to find the missing number. Share the 36 meals between the 4 starters.36 ÷ 4 = 9
0 9 4 3 36 - Write the answer. 9 mains
Check. Multiply back: 4 × 9 = 36. ✓
Watch out. Use the opposite operation: if the total is known, divide by the number you know.
Method. Each of the 4 skirts goes with every top, so the 28 outfits are 4 equal groups. Division undoes multiplication.
- Write it as a multiplication with a missing number. 4 skirts × the number of tops = 28 outfits.4 × ? = 28
- Divide to find the missing number. Share the 28 outfits between the 4 skirts.28 ÷ 4 = 7
0 7 4 2 28 - Write the answer. 7 tops
Check. Multiply back: 4 × 7 = 28. ✓
Watch out. Use the opposite operation: if the total is known, divide by the number you know.
Method. Each of the 5 flavours goes with every cone, so the 45 ice creams are 5 equal groups. Division undoes multiplication.
- Write it as a multiplication with a missing number. 5 flavours × the number of cones = 45 ice creams.5 × ? = 45
- Divide to find the missing number. Share the 45 ice creams between the 5 flavours.45 ÷ 5 = 9
0 9 5 4 45 - Write the answer. 9 cones
Check. Multiply back: 5 × 9 = 45. ✓
Watch out. Use the opposite operation: if the total is known, divide by the number you know.
Key words. You can multiply three numbers in any order and the answer is the same.
Method. You can multiply three numbers in any order. Look for two numbers that make an easy answer (like a pair that makes 10 or 100) and multiply those first.
- Look for a pair that is easy to multiply. 2 × 5 = 10, and multiplying by 10 is easy.2 × 5 = 10
- Multiply by the last number, 17. Multiplying by 10 moves every digit 1 place to the left.10 × 17: move the digits of 17 1 place to the left.
10 × 17 = 170 - Write the answer. 2 × 5 × 17 = 170
Check. Try a different order: 85 × 2 = 170. ✓
Watch out. You can multiply in any order. Pick the pair that gives an easy answer first.
Key words. You can multiply three numbers in any order and the answer is the same.
Method. You can multiply three numbers in any order. Look for two numbers that make an easy answer (like a pair that makes 10 or 100) and multiply those first.
- Look for a pair that is easy to multiply. 4 × 25 = 100, and multiplying by 100 is easy.4 × 25 = 100
- Multiply by the last number, 3. Multiplying by 100 moves every digit 2 places to the left.100 × 3: move the digits of 3 2 places to the left.
100 × 3 = 300 - Write the answer. 4 × 25 × 3 = 300
Check. Try a different order: 75 × 4 = 300. ✓
Watch out. You can multiply in any order. Pick the pair that gives an easy answer first.
Key words. You can multiply three numbers in any order and the answer is the same.
Method. You can multiply three numbers in any order. Look for two numbers that make an easy answer (like a pair that makes 10 or 100) and multiply those first.
- Look for a pair that is easy to multiply. 5 × 8 = 40, which we can work out easily.5 × 8 = 40
- Multiply by the last number, 7. Multiply the answer, 40, by the last number, 7.4 × 7 = 28, so 4 tens × 7 = 28 tens
40 × 7 = 280 - Write the answer. 5 × 8 × 7 = 280
Check. Try a different order: 56 × 5 = 280. ✓
Watch out. You can multiply in any order. Pick the pair that gives an easy answer first.
Key words. You can multiply three numbers in any order and the answer is the same.
Method. You can multiply three numbers in any order. Look for two numbers that make an easy answer (like a pair that makes 10 or 100) and multiply those first.
- Look for a pair that is easy to multiply. 20 × 5 = 100, and multiplying by 100 is easy.20 × 5 = 100
- Multiply by the last number, 9. Multiplying by 100 moves every digit 2 places to the left.100 × 9: move the digits of 9 2 places to the left.
100 × 9 = 900 - Write the answer. 20 × 5 × 9 = 900
Check. Try a different order: 45 × 20 = 900. ✓
Watch out. You can multiply in any order. Pick the pair that gives an easy answer first.
Key words. You can multiply three numbers in any order and the answer is the same.
Method. You can multiply three numbers in any order. Look for two numbers that make an easy answer (like a pair that makes 10 or 100) and multiply those first.
- Look for a pair that is easy to multiply. 2 × 5 = 10, and multiplying by 10 is easy.2 × 5 = 10
- Multiply by the last number, 45. Multiplying by 10 moves every digit 1 place to the left.10 × 45: move the digits of 45 1 place to the left.
10 × 45 = 450 - Write the answer. 2 × 45 × 5 = 450
Check. Try a different order: 225 × 2 = 450. ✓
Watch out. You can multiply in any order. Pick the pair that gives an easy answer first.
Key words. You can multiply three numbers in any order and the answer is the same.
Method. You can multiply three numbers in any order. Look for two numbers that make an easy answer (like a pair that makes 10 or 100) and multiply those first.
- Look for a pair that is easy to multiply. 50 × 2 = 100, and multiplying by 100 is easy.50 × 2 = 100
- Multiply by the last number, 3. Multiplying by 100 moves every digit 2 places to the left.100 × 3: move the digits of 3 2 places to the left.
100 × 3 = 300 - Write the answer. 50 × 3 × 2 = 300
Check. Try a different order: 6 × 50 = 300. ✓
Watch out. You can multiply in any order. Pick the pair that gives an easy answer first.
Key words. You can multiply three numbers in any order and the answer is the same.
Method. You can multiply three numbers in any order. Look for two numbers that make an easy answer (like a pair that makes 10 or 100) and multiply those first.
- Look for a pair that is easy to multiply. 5 × 20 = 100, and multiplying by 100 is easy.5 × 20 = 100
- Multiply by the last number, 4. Multiplying by 100 moves every digit 2 places to the left.100 × 4: move the digits of 4 2 places to the left.
100 × 4 = 400 - Write the answer. 4 × 5 × 20 = 400
Check. Try a different order: 100 × 4 = 400. ✓
Watch out. You can multiply in any order. Pick the pair that gives an easy answer first.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Step 1: Find how many marbles Amir has. Amir has 4 times as many as Leo, so multiply 7 by 4.7 × 4 = 28
- Step 2: Find how many marbles Jo has. Jo has 3 times as many as Amir, so multiply the answer by 3.28 × 3 = 84
T O 2 8 × 3 8 4 2 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.84 marbles
Check. Another way: Jo has 4 × 3 = 12 times as many as Leo. 7 × 12 = 84. ✓
Watch out. Jo has 3 times as many as Amir, not 3 times as many as Leo.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Step 1: Find how many apples Dad picks. Dad picks 4 times as many as Ali, so multiply 35 by 4.35 × 4 = 140
H T O 3 5 × 4 1 4 0 1 2 - Step 2: Find the total. Add the apples Ali picks and the apples Dad picks.35 + 140 = 175
H T O 3 5 + 1 4 0 1 7 5 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.175 apples
Check. Another way: Ali has 1 box and Dad has 4 boxes of 35. 5 boxes × 35 = 175. ✓
Watch out. The question asks for the apples picked altogether. Do not stop after step 1.
Method. Work out how many sweets Ben and Cara each have, then compare.
- Find how many sweets Ben has. Ben has 5 more than Aisha, so add.8 + 5 = 13
- Find how many sweets Cara has. Cara has 5 times as many as Aisha, so multiply.8 × 5 = 40
- Compare. 40 is greater than 13.40 > 13
- Answer. Cara has more. She has 40 sweets and Ben has 13.
Check. Cara has 27 more than Ben: 40 − 13 = 27. ✓
Watch out. “5 more” means add 5. “5 times as many” means multiply by 5.
Method. Try some starting numbers. Compare adding 4 with multiplying by 4.
- Try the numbers. Work out both for each number.1: add 4 gives 5, multiply by 4 gives 4
2: add 4 gives 6, multiply by 4 gives 8
3: add 4 gives 7, multiply by 4 gives 12
10: add 4 gives 14, multiply by 4 gives 40 - Compare. For 1, adding is bigger (5 > 4). For 2, multiplying is bigger (8 > 6). For 3 and 10, multiplying is bigger.It changes depending on the number.
- Decide. One example works and others do not.Sometimes
Check. Only for 1 does adding 4 beat multiplying by 4 (1 + 4 = 5 and 1 × 4 = 4). ✓
Watch out. Give an example that works and one that does not. For “sometimes”, one of each is enough.
Method. Draw the table of 3 hats and 5 tops. A new hat is a new row. Count the boxes in the new row.
- Picture the 15 outfits. 3 rows (hats) of 5 boxes (tops).
hat \ top top 1 top 2 top 3 top 4 top 5 hat 1 1 2 3 4 5 hat 2 6 7 8 9 10 hat 3 11 12 13 14 15 - Add the new hat. The new hat can go with all 5 tops, so it makes a new row of 5 outfits.1 × 5 = 5 new outfits
- Check with the new total. 4 hats and 5 tops.4 × 5 = 20 outfits, and 20 − 15 = 5
Check. 3 × 5 = 15 and 4 × 5 = 20, so there are 5 more. ✓
Watch out. One more hat gives 5 more outfits (one for each top), not just 1 more.
A 3 hats and 5 tops. How many outfits?
B Sam has 5 stickers. Tom has 3 more. How many does Tom have?
C Ali has 5 books. Bea has 3 times as many. How many does Bea have?
D 15 sweets are shared between 3 children. How many does each child get?
Method. Work out the answer to each problem. The two that make 15 can be solved with 3 × 5.
- Work out A. Every hat goes with every top: multiply.3 × 5 = 15
- Work out B. “3 more” means add.5 + 3 = 8
- Work out C. “3 times as many” means multiply.5 × 3 = 15
- Work out D. Sharing means divide.15 ÷ 3 = 5
- Choose. A and C
Check. Both A and C are multiplication problems with the numbers 3 and 5. ✓
Watch out. Read each problem. B is an addition, and D is a division.
Method. Each three-course meal is one starter, one main and one pudding. Use what you know about the starters and puddings to find the mains.
- Find the number of starter-and-pudding pairs. Every starter goes with every pudding.3 × 2 = 6
- Write the missing-number sentence. The number of mains times 6 is the total.6 × ? = 30
- Divide to find the mains. Division is the opposite of multiplication.30 ÷ 6 = 5
Check. 3 × 5 × 2 = 15 × 2 = 30. ✓
Watch out. Multiply the numbers you know first, then divide the total by the result.
Word problems with bar models
Printable: Worksheet (PDF) · Answers (PDF) · Open this lesson on its own page
Real problems often take more than one step. Use these five steps every time.
- Read the problem. What do you know? What do you need to find out?
- Draw a bar model.
- Choose which operations to use.
- Work it out, one step at a time, with a written method.
- Check your answer. Does it make sense? Does it answer the question?
A bar model is a picture of the numbers. For equal groups, draw equal boxes: the problem is a multiplication or a division. For a whole made of parts, draw the parts side by side: add or subtract. To compare two amounts, draw two bars, one above the other.
Some problems use two operations. A baker makes 6 trays of 24 buns, then sells 105. First multiply (6 × 24 = 144 buns baked). Then subtract (144 − 105 = 39 buns left). Always check the question at the end: the answer to the first step is not always the answer to the question.
Key words. A bar model is a drawing of boxes that shows the numbers in a problem. A multi-step problem needs more than one calculation.
Key ideas
- Read, draw, choose, work, check.
- Equal groups: multiply to find the total, divide to find the size of a group or the number of groups.
- Whole made of parts: add the parts, or subtract a part from the whole.
- Write the working for each step and the unit with each answer.
- Check: does the answer fit the story and answer the question?
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. The whole is the buns baked. 105 are sold. We want the part that is left.
- Step 1: Find how many buns the baker makes. 6 trays with 24 buns on each, so multiply.24 × 6 = 144
H T O 2 4 × 6 1 4 4 1 2 - Step 2: Find how many buns are left. She sells 105 buns, so take them away from the total.144 − 105 = 39
H T O 1 3 414 4− 1 0 5 3 9 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.39 buns left
Check. Add back: 39 + 105 = 144, and 144 ÷ 6 = 24. ✓
Watch out. The answer to step 1 (144) is not the answer to the question. Keep going to step 2.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. 4 equal tickets share the £36. We find one ticket first.
- Step 1: Find the cost of 1 ticket. 4 tickets cost £36 altogether, so share £36 into 4 equal parts.£36 ÷ 4 = £9
0 9 4 3 36 - Step 2: Find the cost of 7 tickets. 7 tickets cost 7 times as much as 1 ticket.£9 × 7 = £63
- Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.£63
Check. Another way: 7 tickets is 4 tickets plus 3 tickets: £36 + 3 × £9 = £36 + £27 = £63. ✓
Watch out. Find the cost of ONE first. Then multiply by the number of tickets you need.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. All 252 stickers are shared into 6 equal packs.
- Step 1: Find how many stickers Jack and Mia have altogether. Put the two amounts together: add.138 + 114 = 252
H T O 1 3 8 + 1 1 4 2 5 2 1 - Step 2: Share the stickers equally between 6 packs. Equal sharing means divide.252 ÷ 6 = 42
0 4 2 6 2 25 12 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.42 stickers in each pack
Check. Multiply back: 42 × 6 = 252, and 138 + 114 = 252. ✓
Watch out. Add first, then divide. If you divide 138 by 6 you forget Mia’s stickers.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. The whole is the £5 note (500p). Part of it pays for the pens. The rest is the change.
- Step 1: Find the cost of 5 pens. 5 pens at 85p each, so multiply.85p × 5 = 425p
H T O 8 5 × 5 4 2 5 4 2 - Step 2: Find the change. The change is the money paid take away the cost.500p − 425p = 75p
H T O 4 59 010 0− 4 2 5 7 5 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.75p change
Check. Add back: 425p + 75p = 500p. ✓
Watch out. Keep the units the same: £5 is 500p. Work in pence all the way through.
Method. First find how many minibuses are needed (divide, and think about the remainder). Then multiply by the cost of one minibus.
- Draw a bar model. The 52 pupils are put into groups of 8, with some left over.
- Step 1: divide the pupils by 8. Each minibus holds 8 pupils.52 ÷ 8 = 6 remainder 4
0 6 r 4 8 5 52 - Decide what to do with the remainder. 4 pupils are left over, but they still need to travel. We need one more minibus: round up.6 + 1 = 7 minibuses
- Step 2: find the cost. Each minibus costs £35 to hire, so multiply 7 by 35.£35 × 7 = £245
H T O 3 5 × 7 2 4 5 2 3 - Write the answer. £245
Check. 7 × 8 = 56, which is enough for 52 pupils, but 6 × 8 = 48 is not enough. ✓
Watch out. Everyone must have a seat, so round the number of minibuses UP.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. Bea has one box. Amir has three boxes the same size. Together they have 84.
- Step 1: Find how many equal boxes there are altogether. Bea has 1 box and Amir has 3 boxes the same size.1 + 3 = 4
- Step 2: Find the size of one box. The 4 equal boxes share the 84 cards, so divide.84 ÷ 4 = 21
2 1 4 8 4 - Step 3: Find how many cards Amir has. Amir has 3 boxes.21 × 3 = 63
T O 2 1 × 3 6 3 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.Bea 21 cards, Amir 63 cards
Check. Add: 21 + 63 = 84. And 63 is 3 times 21. ✓
Watch out. Amir has 3 times as many as Bea, so there are 4 boxes in the whole bar (1 + 3), not 3.
Watch out
The answer to the first step is not always the answer to the question. Look back at what the question asks for. Also keep your units the same: pounds with pounds, pence with pence. And do not add when the problem says “times as many”.Exercise 4G Word problems with bar models
Non-calculatorMethod. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. The whole is the pencils in the boxes. 95 are sold.
- Step 1: Find how many pencils there are in the boxes. 8 boxes with 36 pencils in each, so multiply.36 × 8 = 288
H T O 3 6 × 8 2 8 8 2 4 - Step 2: Find how many are left. 95 are sold, so subtract.288 − 95 = 193
H T O 1 218 88 − 9 5 1 9 3 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.193 pencils left
Check. Add back: 193 + 95 = 288. ✓
Watch out. The question asks how many are LEFT, so do not stop at step 1.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. Two amounts are spent. Add them to find the total.
- Step 1: Find the cost of the tickets. 5 tickets at £14 each.£14 × 5 = £70
T O 1 4 × 5 7 0 2 - Step 2: Find the cost of the drinks. 2 drinks at £3 each.£3 × 2 = £6
- Step 3: Add the two costs. Both are spent, so add.£70 + £6 = £76
- Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.£76
Check. Estimate: 5 × £15 = £75, and the drinks cost a few pounds, so about £80. ✓
Watch out. There are two different things to buy. Work out both before you add.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. The whole is 500p. Part of it pays for the comics.
- Step 1: Find the cost of 4 comics. 4 comics at 85p each, so multiply.85p × 4 = 340p
H T O 8 5 × 4 3 4 0 3 2 - Step 2: Find the change. Take the cost away from the £5 note (500p).500p − 340p = 160p
H T O 4 510 00 − 3 4 0 1 6 0 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.160p change
Check. Add back: 340p + 160p = 500p. ✓
Watch out. Change to pence first: £5 = 500p.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. 5 equal notebooks cost £45 in total.
- Step 1: Find the cost of 1 notebook. 5 notebooks cost £45, so share £45 into 5 equal parts.£45 ÷ 5 = £9
0 9 5 4 45 - Step 2: Find the cost of 8 notebooks. 8 notebooks cost 8 times as much as 1.£9 × 8 = £72
- Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.£72
Check. Another way: 8 notebooks is 5 notebooks and 3 more: £45 + £27 = £72. ✓
Watch out. Find the cost of one notebook first.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. All 282 loaves are shared into 6 equal crates.
- Step 1: Add the loaves. Loaves sold on both days are put together.138 + 144 = 282
H T O 1 3 8 + 1 4 4 2 8 2 1 - Step 2: Share the loaves equally. Equal sharing between 6 crates means divide.282 ÷ 6 = 47
0 4 7 6 2 28 42 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.47 loaves in each crate
Check. Multiply back: 47 × 6 = 282. ✓
Watch out. Add the two days first. Then divide.
Method. Find how many minibuses are needed. Divide, then round up because everyone needs a seat. Then multiply by the cost of one minibus.
- Step 1: divide the pupils by 9. Each minibus holds 9 pupils.85 ÷ 9 = 9 remainder 4
0 9 r 4 9 8 85 - Decide what to do with the remainder. 4 pupils are left over, but they still need a minibus. Round up.9 + 1 = 10 minibuses
- Step 2: find the cost. Each minibus costs £30, so multiply by 10.£30 × 10 = £300
- Write the answer. £300
Check. 9 × 9 = 81, which is not enough for 85 pupils. 10 × 9 = 90 is enough. ✓
Watch out. Round the number of minibuses UP. 9 minibuses would leave 4 pupils behind.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. Sue’s bar is 3 times as long as Tom’s. The dashed part is the difference.
- Step 1: Find how long Sue’s rope is. Sue’s rope is 3 times as long as Tom’s, so multiply.125 × 3 = 375
H T O 1 2 5 × 3 3 7 5 1 - Step 2: Find how much longer it is. The difference is the bigger length take away the smaller.375 − 125 = 250
H T O 3 7 5 − 1 2 5 2 5 0 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.250 cm longer
Check. The difference is 2 more boxes of 125: 2 × 125 = 250. ✓
Watch out. Step 1 gives Sue’s length, not the difference. Subtract Tom’s length to answer the question.
Key words. You can multiply three numbers in any order and the answer is the same.
Method. You can multiply three numbers in any order. Look for two numbers that make an easy answer (like a pair that makes 10 or 100) and multiply those first.
- Look for a pair that is easy to multiply. 6 × 5 = 30, which we can work out easily.6 × 5 = 30
- Multiply by the last number, 8. Multiply the answer, 30, by the last number, 8.3 × 8 = 24, so 3 tens × 8 = 24 tens
30 × 8 = 240 - Write the answer. 6 × 8 × 5 = 240
Check. Try a different order: 40 × 6 = 240. ✓
Watch out. You can multiply in any order. Pick the pair that gives an easy answer first.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. The whole rope is 245 m. 35 m is used. The rest is cut into 7 equal pieces.
- Step 1: Find how much rope is left. 35 m is used, so take it away from 245 m.245 − 35 = 210
H T O 2 4 5 − 3 5 2 1 0 - Step 2: Share the rest into 7 equal pieces. Equal pieces: divide.210 ÷ 7 = 30
0 3 0 7 2 21 0 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.30 m long
Check. Multiply back: 30 × 7 = 210, and 210 + 35 = 245. ✓
Watch out. Take the 35 m away FIRST. Then divide what is left.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. The whole is the £50. Part of it pays for the tickets.
- Step 1: Find the cost of the adult tickets. 2 adults at £8 each.£8 × 2 = £16
- Step 2: Find the cost of the child tickets. 3 children at £5 each.£5 × 3 = £15
- Step 3: Find the total cost. Add the two costs.£16 + £15 = £31
- Step 4: Find the change. Take the total cost away from the £50 paid.£50 − £31 = £19
- Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.£19 change
Check. Add back: £31 + £19 = £50. ✓
Watch out. There are two kinds of ticket. Work out both costs before you take away.
Method. Leo has added, but the tickets are equal groups. Work out the cost of 1 ticket first.
- Find the cost of 1 ticket. Share £36 between 4 tickets.£36 ÷ 4 = £9
- Find the cost of 8 tickets. Each ticket costs £9, so multiply by 8.8 × £9 = £72
- Say what went wrong. Leo added £8, but 4 more tickets cost 4 × £9 = £36 more, not £8 more.The cost goes up in equal steps. This is multiplication, not adding the number of tickets.
- Write the correct answer. £72
Check. 8 tickets is double 4 tickets, so double £36 = £72. ✓
Watch out. If the number of tickets doubles, the cost doubles. It does not go up by the number of tickets.
Method. Draw a bar model. Count the boxes. Then divide to find the size of one box.
- Draw the bar model. Priya has 1 box. Dev has 4 boxes the same size. The total is 5 boxes.
- Find how many boxes there are altogether. 1 box for Priya and 4 boxes for Dev.1 + 4 = 5
- Find the size of one box. The 5 equal boxes make 75.75 ÷ 5 = 15
- Find how many Dev has. Dev has 4 boxes.4 × 15 = 60
Check. 15 + 60 = 75, and 60 = 4 × 15. ✓
Watch out. There are 5 boxes in the whole bar (1 + 4). Do not divide by 4.
Method. Try some numbers that divide exactly by 6. Check whether they also divide exactly by 3. Then explain why.
- Try some numbers in the 6 times table. Divide each by 3.12 ÷ 6 = 2 and 12 ÷ 3 = 4
18 ÷ 6 = 3 and 18 ÷ 3 = 6
30 ÷ 6 = 5 and 30 ÷ 3 = 10
102 ÷ 6 = 17 and 102 ÷ 3 = 34 - Explain why. A number that divides by 6 is made of equal groups of 6. Each group of 6 is two groups of 3, so it divides by 3 too.6 = 3 × 2
- Decide. Always
Check. Example: 42 = 7 × 6 = 14 × 3. ✓
Watch out. The rule only goes one way. A number that divides by 3 does not always divide by 6 (for example 9).
Method. Work out both sides. Then explain why they are equal.
- Work out 6 × 24. Partition 24 into 20 + 4.6 × 20 = 120 6 × 4 = 24 120 + 24 = 144
- Work out 3 × 48. Partition 48 into 40 + 8.3 × 40 = 120 3 × 8 = 24 120 + 24 = 144
- Compare. Both make 144.6 × 24 = 144 = 3 × 48
- Explain why. 6 is double 3 and 24 is half of 48. Doubling one number and halving the other keeps the answer the same.6 = 3 × 2 and 48 = 24 × 2
Check. 144 ÷ 6 = 24 and 144 ÷ 3 = 48. ✓
Watch out. Doubling one number and halving the other leaves the answer unchanged.
Chapter summary
| Skill | Method |
|---|---|
| × and ÷ by 10, 100 | Digits move 1 place (10) or 2 places (100): left to multiply, right to divide. Zeros are place holders. 35 × 100 = 3,500; 3,500 ÷ 10 = 350. |
| Distributive law | 34 × 6 = (30 + 4) × 6 = 30 × 6 + 4 × 6 = 180 + 24 = 204. Near a round number: 29 × 6 = 30 × 6 − 6. |
| Grid method | Partition into hundreds, tens and ones. Multiply each part. Add the partial products. Keep the zeros. |
| Expanded column | Multiply each digit by its value: 7 × 6, 40 × 6, 300 × 6. Write each on its own line. Add. |
| Short multiplication | Start with the ones. Write the ones digit of each answer, carry the tens digit and add it in the next column. Estimate to check. |
| Division with place value | Split into chunks: 84 ÷ 4 = 80 ÷ 4 + 4 ÷ 4. Use known facts: 2,400 ÷ 6 = 400. |
| Short division (bus stop) | Start on the left. Divide each digit, carry the remainder to the next digit. Write 0 when a step is too small. Check by multiplying back. |
| Remainders | The remainder is what is left over and is smaller than the divisor. Check: answer × divisor + remainder = start. |
| Remainders in context | Left over: the remainder. Full groups: ignore it. Enough for everyone: round up. Sharing: say both parts. |
| Scaling | “n times as many”: multiply. To go back, divide. Do not confuse with “n more” (add). |
| Correspondence | n things each connected to m things make n × m combinations (3 hats and 5 tops: 15 outfits). Three groups: multiply all three. |
| Three numbers | Multiply in any order. Look for a pair that makes 10 or 100 first. |
| Word problems | Read, draw a bar model, choose the operations, work one step at a time, check the answer fits the question. |
Can you…?
- I can multiply and divide whole numbers by 10 and 100 by moving the digits.
- I can use partitioning and the distributive law to multiply a two-digit number by a one-digit number in my head.
- I can use the grid method and the expanded method to multiply two-digit and three-digit numbers by one digit.
- I can use short multiplication with carrying, and check with an estimate.
- I can divide using place value and known facts.
- I can use the bus stop method to divide two-digit and three-digit numbers by one digit, with and without a remainder.
- I can decide what a remainder means in a story.
- I can solve problems with “n times as many”.
- I can solve problems like 3 hats and 5 tops (correspondence).
- I can multiply three numbers by choosing an easy pair first.
- I can solve multi-step word problems with a bar model.
Key terms
- Digit
- One of the symbols 0 to 9 used to write numbers.
- Place holder
- A zero that keeps other digits in the right columns, as in 340.
- Partition
- To split a number into parts, such as 347 = 300 + 40 + 7.
- Partial product
- The answer to one part of a multiplication, such as 40 × 6 = 240.
- Distributive law
- Splitting a number and multiplying each part: (30 + 4) × 6 = 30 × 6 + 4 × 6.
- Grid method
- Putting the parts of a number in a table and multiplying each part.
- Carry
- Moving the tens digit of an answer into the next column.
- Short multiplication
- A written method for multiplying by a one-digit number, column by column.
- Short division
- The bus stop method for dividing a number by a one-digit number.
- Divisor
- The number you divide by.
- Remainder
- What is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
- Exchange
- Swapping 1 of a place for 10 of the next place down, such as 1 ten for 10 ones.
- Scaling
- Making an amount a number of times bigger or smaller, such as 4 times as many.
- Correspondence
- Pairing each object in one group with each object in another group to count the combinations.
- Combination
- One choice from each group put together, such as one hat and one top.
- Estimate
- A quick answer that is close, found by rounding.
- Bar model
- A drawing of boxes that shows the numbers in a problem.
- Inverse
- The opposite operation. Multiplying and dividing undo each other.
Exercise 4Z Check-up (non-calculator)
Non-calculatorKey words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To multiply by 10, move every digit 1 place to the left and put a zero in the empty place on the right. Do not just “add a zero”: it is the digits that move.
- Say what each digit is worth. The digits have different values because of their columns.4 tens
7 ones - Make every digit 10 times bigger. Multiplying by 10 makes each digit 10 times bigger. That moves it 1 place to the left.4 tens become 4 hundreds
7 ones become 7 tens - Show it in a place-value table. The 1 gap on the right is empty, so we put a zero there.
Th H T O 47 4 7 × 10 ← 1 place left 470 4 7 0 - Write the answer. The zero place holders keep every digit in the right column.47 × 10 = 470
Check. Divide back: 470 ÷ 10 = 47. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits, then fill the empty place with a zero. Check the answer is 10 times bigger.
Key words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. To divide by 100, move every digit 2 places to the right. A number that ends in 2 zeros will divide exactly.
- Look at the end of the number. Are there at least 2 zeros? Every digit moves 2 places to the right, so the ones column must be able to hold the moved digits. A number that ends in 2 zeros divides exactly.3,200 ends in 2 zeros. ✓
- Make every digit 100 times smaller. Dividing by 100 makes each digit 100 times smaller. That moves it 2 places to the right.3 thousands become 3 tens
2 hundreds become 2 ones - Show it in a place-value table. The last 2 zeros fall off the end.
Th H T O 3,200 3 2 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 32 3 2 - Write the answer. 3,200 ÷ 100 = 32
Check. Multiply back: 32 × 100 = 3,200. ✓
Watch out. Move the digits 2 places to the right. Check the answer is 100 times smaller.
Key words. The distributive law says that (30 + 4) × 6 is the same as 30 × 6 + 4 × 6. You can split a number and multiply the parts.
Method. Partition the two-digit number into tens and ones. Multiply each part by the one-digit number and add the two answers. This is called the distributive law.
- Partition the number into tens and ones. Tens and ones are easy to multiply.38 = 30 + 8
- Write it as two multiplications. This is the distributive law: multiplying a sum by 6 is the same as multiplying each part by 6 and adding.38 × 6 = (30 + 8) × 6 = (30 × 6) + (8 × 6)
- Multiply the tens part. 3 × 6 = 18, so 3 tens × 6 = 18 tens.30 × 6 = 180
- Multiply the ones part. Use a times table fact.8 × 6 = 48
- Add the two answers. 180 + 48 = 228
Check. Estimate: 38 is about 40 (to the nearest 10). 40 × 6 = 240. Our answer, 228, is a bit less than 240, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Both parts must be multiplied by 6. A common mistake is to multiply only the tens, or only the ones.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 4 3 6 × 5 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.6 × 5 = 30
30 is 3 tens and 0 ones. Write 0 in the ones column and carry 3 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 3 we carried.3 × 5 = 15, and 15 + 3 (carried) = 18
18 is 1 hundred and 8 tens. Write 8 in the tens column and carry 1 to the hundreds column. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 1 we carried.4 × 5 = 20, and 20 + 1 (carried) = 21
21 is 2 thousands and 1 hundred. Write 1 in the hundreds column and carry 2 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 2 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 2 in the thousands column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
Th H T O 4 3 6 × 5 2 1 8 0 2 1 3
436 × 5 = 2,180
Check. Estimate: 436 is about 400 (to the nearest 100). 400 × 5 = 2,000. Our answer, 2,180, is a bit more than 2,000, which is right because we rounded down. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
6 1 5 6 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.1 ÷ 6: 1 is smaller than 6, so we cannot make a whole hundred for each share. Write 0 (this leading 0 is not part of the answer).
Exchange the 1 hundred for 10 tens and carry them to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 1 that was carried.The carried 1 makes 10 tens. With the 5 tens there are 10 + 5 = 15 tens.
15 ÷ 6: 2 × 6 = 12, and 15 − 12 = 3. Write 2 above the 5.
Carry the remainder 3 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 3 that was carried.The carried 3 makes 30 ones. With the 6 ones there are 30 + 6 = 36 ones.
36 ÷ 6: 6 × 6 = 36. Write 6 above the 6.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Ignore any 0 at the front of the answer.
0 2 6 6 1 15 36
156 ÷ 6 = 26
Check. Multiply back: 26 × 6 = 20 × 6 + 6 × 6 = 120 + 36 = 156. ✓
Watch out. If the first digit is smaller than 6, write 0 above it (not in the final answer) and carry the digit to the next place.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
4 8 7 - Divide the tens. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.8 ÷ 4 = 2
Write 2 above the 8. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right.Nothing was carried, so there are just 7 ones.
7 ÷ 4: 1 × 4 = 4, and 7 − 4 = 3. Write 1 above the 7.
The remainder is 3. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
2 1 r 3 4 8 7
87 ÷ 4 = 21 remainder 3
Check. Multiply back: 21 × 4 = 20 × 4 + 1 × 4 = 80 + 4 = 84
84 + 3 (the remainder) = 87. ✓
Watch out. The remainder must always be smaller than the number you divide by (4). If it is not, you can divide again.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 75 into equal groups of 8, so we divide.75 ÷ 8
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.75 ÷ 8 = 9 remainder 3
0 9 r 3 8 7 75 - Decide what the remainder means. Every one must be in a group. The remainder still needs a group of its own, so we need one more group. We round UP.9 boxes are full. The last 3 eggs need another one: 9 + 1 = 10
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.10 boxes.
Check. Multiply back: 9 × 8 = 72, and 72 + 3 = 75. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the leftovers. They still need somewhere to go, so we round up, not down.
Key words. Scaling means making something a number of times bigger. “3 times as many” means 3 equal groups, so you multiply by 3. To go back, divide by 3.
Method. 7 times as many means 7 equal groups, each the same size as the smaller amount. Multiply the smaller amount by 7.
- Draw a bar model. Jo has one box. Kim has 7 boxes the same size.
- Choose the operation. 7 equal boxes: multiply the size of one box by 7.12 × 7
- Work it out. Use a written method if you need to.12 × 7 = 84
- Write the answer. Include the unit.84 stickers
Check. Divide back: 84 ÷ 7 = 12. ✓
Watch out. “7 times as many” is multiplying by 7. It is not adding 7.
Key words. A combination is one choice from each group put together. To find how many combinations there are, multiply the numbers of choices.
Method. Each choice from one group can be paired with every choice from the other group. So multiply the numbers of choices together.
- Take just one shirt. Pick the first shirt. It can go with any of the 6 pairs of trousers, so that makes 6 outfits.1 shirt → 6 outfits
- Do the same for every shirt. All the shirts have the same choices. There are 4 shirts, so there are 4 groups of 6 outfits.6 + 6 + 6 + 6 = 24
- Show every choice in a table. Each box is one outfit: one shirt with one pair of trousers. Count the boxes: it is an array.
shirt \ pair of trousers pair of trousers 1 pair of trousers 2 pair of trousers 3 pair of trousers 4 pair of trousers 5 pair of trousers 6 shirt 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 shirt 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 shirt 3 13 14 15 16 17 18 shirt 4 19 20 21 22 23 24 - Multiply. 4 rows of 6 is a multiplication.4 × 6 = 24
- Write the answer. Say what the number means.24 different outfits
Check. Swap the numbers: 6 × 4 = 24. ✓
Watch out. Do not add the numbers. 3 + 5 = 8 would only count each item once. Every shirt goes with every pair of trousers, so multiply.
Key words. You can multiply three numbers in any order and the answer is the same.
Method. You can multiply three numbers in any order. Look for two numbers that make an easy answer (like a pair that makes 10 or 100) and multiply those first.
- Look for a pair that is easy to multiply. 5 × 2 = 10, and multiplying by 10 is easy.5 × 2 = 10
- Multiply by the last number, 14. Multiplying by 10 moves every digit 1 place to the left.10 × 14: move the digits of 14 1 place to the left.
10 × 14 = 140 - Write the answer. 5 × 14 × 2 = 140
Check. Try a different order: 28 × 5 = 140. ✓
Watch out. You can multiply in any order. Pick the pair that gives an easy answer first.
Total 18 marks. Allow about 18 minutes.
Exercise 4X SATs-style questions
Non-calculatorKey words. A digit is one of the symbols 0 to 9. A place holder is a zero that keeps the other digits in the right columns. Place value tells you what each digit is worth.
Method. Find out how far the digits move. One place to the right is ÷ 10. Two places to the right is ÷ 100.
- Compare the two numbers. 4,500 is divided by the missing number to make 45.4,500 → 45
- Count how many places the digits moved. Each digit of 4,500 moved to the right.
Th H T O 4,500 4 5 0 0 ÷ 100 → 2 places right 45 4 5 - Say what the number is. Digits that move 2 places to the right mean ÷ 100.4,500 ÷ 100 = 45
Check. 45 × 100 = 4,500. ✓
Watch out. Put your answer back in the box and read the whole sentence. It must be true.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
H T O 3 8 × 7 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.8 × 7 = 56
56 is 5 tens and 6 ones. Write 6 in the ones column and carry 5 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 5 we carried.3 × 7 = 21, and 21 + 5 (carried) = 26
26 is 2 hundreds and 6 tens. Write 6 in the tens column and carry 2 to the hundreds column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the hundreds column, but we carried 2 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 2 in the hundreds column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
H T O 3 8 × 7 2 6 6 2 5
38 × 7 = 266
Check. Estimate: 38 is about 40 (to the nearest 10). 40 × 7 = 280. Our answer, 266, is a bit less than 280, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short multiplication is a written method. You write the number to multiply on top, the one-digit number below it, and multiply one column at a time, starting with the ones. When a column makes 10 or more, you carry the tens digit to the next column and add it there.
Method. Write the numbers in columns. Multiply each digit by the one-digit number, starting with the ones. If an answer is 10 or more, write the ones digit and carry the tens digit to the next column.
- Write the numbers in columns. Ones go under ones, tens under tens and hundreds under hundreds. The one-digit number goes under the ones.
Th H T O 3 6 5 × 3 - Multiply the ones. Always start with the ones, on the right.5 × 3 = 15
15 is 1 ten and 5 ones. Write 5 in the ones column and carry 1 to the tens column. - Multiply the tens. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 1 we carried.6 × 3 = 18, and 18 + 1 (carried) = 19
19 is 1 hundred and 9 tens. Write 9 in the tens column and carry 1 to the hundreds column. - Multiply the hundreds. Now the next column to the left. Multiply, then add the 1 we carried.3 × 3 = 9, and 9 + 1 (carried) = 10
10 is 1 thousand and 0 hundreds. Write 0 in the hundreds column and carry 1 to the thousands column. - Write the carried digit. There are no digits left to multiply in the thousands column, but we carried 1 into it.Nothing to multiply. Write 1 in the thousands column.
- Read the answer. Check that the answer has about the right number of digits, then write it.
Th H T O 3 6 5 × 3 1 0 9 5 1 1 1
365 × 3 = 1,095
Check. Estimate: 365 is about 400 (to the nearest 100). 400 × 3 = 1,200. Our answer, 1,095, is a bit less than 1,200, which is right because we rounded up. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the carried digits. Write each one small, then add it in the next column AFTER you have multiplied.
Key words. Short division (the bus stop method) is a written way to divide. The number you divide goes inside the bus stop and the number you divide by goes outside. A remainder is what is left over when a number does not divide exactly.
Method. Draw the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time, starting on the left. If there is a remainder, carry it to the next digit as extra ones, tens or hundreds.
- Draw the bus stop. The number we are dividing goes inside. The number we divide by goes outside, on the left.
7 9 5 2 - Divide the hundreds. Always start on the left, with the biggest place value.9 ÷ 7 = 1, remainder 2
Write 1 above the 9.
Exchange the remainder: 2 hundreds become 20 tens. Carry 2 to the next digit. - Divide the tens. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 2 that was carried.The carried 2 makes 20 tens. With the 5 tens there are 20 + 5 = 25 tens.
25 ÷ 7: 3 × 7 = 21, and 25 − 21 = 4. Write 3 above the 5.
Carry the remainder 4 to the next digit. - Divide the ones. Move to the next digit on the right. Add the 4 that was carried.The carried 4 makes 40 ones. With the 2 ones there are 40 + 2 = 42 ones.
42 ÷ 7: 6 × 7 = 42. Write 6 above the 2.
Nothing is left over, so there is no remainder. - Read the answer. Read the digits above the line from left to right.
1 3 6 7 9 25 42
952 ÷ 7 = 136
Check. Multiply back: 136 × 7 = 100 × 7 + 30 × 7 + 6 × 7 = 700 + 210 + 42 = 952. ✓
Watch out. Start on the left, with the biggest place value. Carry any remainder to the next digit.
Method. Work out each multiplication. Then tick the two that make 240.
- Work out each one. Use place value: multiply the digits, then put the zeros back.A: 6 × 40 = 240
B: 8 × 30 = 240
C: 4 × 50 = 200
D: 5 × 45 = 225 - Choose the two that make 240. A and B
Check. 240 ÷ 6 = 40 and 240 ÷ 8 = 30. ✓
Watch out. 2 marks: 1 mark for each correct box. If you tick three boxes you lose the marks.
Key words. A remainder is what is left over after you divide. What you do with it depends on the story: ignore it, round up, or say how many are left over.
Method. Divide to find how many groups of the number fit. Then think about what the remainder means in the story.
- Choose the operation. We are putting 100 into equal groups of 9, so we divide.100 ÷ 9
- Work it out with the bus stop. Divide one digit at a time and keep the remainder.100 ÷ 9 = 11 remainder 1
0 1 1 r 1 9 1 10 10 - Decide what the remainder means. Every one must be in a group. The remainder still needs a group of its own, so we need one more group. We round UP.11 minibuses are full. The last 1 pupils need another one: 11 + 1 = 12
- Write the answer. Answer the question that was asked.12 minibuses.
Check. Multiply back: 11 × 9 = 99, and 99 + 1 = 100. ✓
Watch out. Do not forget the leftovers. They still need somewhere to go, so we round up, not down.
Key words. A combination is one choice from each group put together. To find how many combinations there are, multiply the numbers of choices.
Method. Each choice from one group can be paired with every choice from the other group. So multiply the numbers of choices together.
- Find how many choices there are for the first two. Each of the 5 tops can go with each of the 4 pairs of trousers.5 × 4 = 20
- Now bring in the hats. Each of those 20 choices can go with each of the 2 hats.20 × 2 = 40
- Write the answer. Say what the number means.40 different outfits
Check. Multiply in a different order: 4 × 2 = 8, then 8 × 5 = 40. ✓
Watch out. Do not add the numbers. 3 + 5 = 8 would only count each item once. Every top goes with every pair of trousers, so multiply.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows what we know and what we need to find out.
- Step 1: Find the height of Ben’s tower. Ben’s tower is 6 times as tall as Tia’s, so multiply.18 × 6 = 108
H T O 1 8 × 6 1 0 8 1 4 - Step 2: Find how much taller it is. Subtract Tia’s height.108 − 18 = 90
H T O 0 110 08 − 1 8 9 0 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.90 cm taller
Check. Another way: the difference is 5 more towers the size of Tia’s tower. 5 × 18 = 90. ✓
Watch out. 2 marks: 1 mark for 18 × 6 = 108 and 1 mark for 108 − 18 = 90.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. A bar model shows what we know and what we need to find out.
- Step 1: Find how many pencils there are. 8 packs with 36 pencils in each, so multiply.36 × 8 = 288
H T O 3 6 × 8 2 8 8 2 4 - Step 2: Share the pencils between the classes. 288 pencils are shared equally between 6 classes, so divide.288 ÷ 6 = 48
0 4 8 6 2 28 48 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.48 pencils for each class
Check. Multiply back: 48 × 6 = 288, and 36 × 8 = 288. ✓
Watch out. 3 marks: 1 mark for 36 × 8 = 288, 1 mark for dividing 288 by 6, and 1 mark for the answer 48.
Method. Read the problem, draw a bar model, then decide which operations to use. Work out one step at a time.
- Draw a bar model. Bea has one box. Amir has three boxes the same size.
- Step 1: Find how many equal boxes there are altogether. Bea has 1 box and Amir has 3 boxes the same size.1 + 3 = 4
- Step 2: Find the size of one box. The 4 boxes make 84 cards, so divide.84 ÷ 4 = 21
2 1 4 8 4 - Step 3: Find how many cards Amir has. Amir has 3 boxes.21 × 3 = 63
T O 2 1 × 3 6 3 - Write the answer. Include the unit and make sure it answers the question.63 cards
Check. 21 + 63 = 84. ✓
Watch out. 3 marks: 1 mark for 1 + 3 = 4 boxes, 1 mark for 84 ÷ 4 = 21, and 1 mark for 21 × 3 = 63.